JP6524769B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Pachinko machines, slot machines and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a bonus is provided to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is general that an effect for causing a player to predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery is performed.

  About a pachinko machine Specifically, a lottery is performed based on the game ball entering the ball entry section provided in the game area, and the variation display of the pattern is performed on the display surface of the display device, and the lottery is performed It is known that, when a winning result is obtained, the combination of a specific pattern etc. is displayed on the display surface as a final stop, and a transition to a predetermined gaming state is made. And when it transfers to a predetermined | prescribed game state, opening and closing of the ball throwing apparatus provided in the game area, for example is started (for example, refer patent document 1).

JP, 2009-261415, A

  Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 is a specific gaming state in which a predetermined variable entering means is in an open state after that, based on the occurrence of the privilege giving opportunity by the game operation of the player during the specific period. State generation means for generating
A means for giving a player an object to be given, which is either a game ball or usable game ball number information, when the game ball enters the predetermined variable ball entry means;
Equipped with
As the specific period, at least a first specific period and a second specific period are set such that the degree of expectation at which the benefit provision trigger occurs differs.
In the state generation means, the firing operation is performed in the specific gaming state due to the occurrence of the benefit giving trigger in the first specific period and in the specific gaming state due to the occurrence of the benefit giving opportunity in the second specific period. In the case where the privilege giving occasion occurs in the first specific period, while making the number of giving targets expected to be given in the specific gaming state equal in comparison with the case where it is performed in the same mode It is characterized in that the minimum time required for the specific gaming state to end is different from the case where the bonus giving trigger occurs in the second specific period .

  According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a perspective view which disassembles and shows the main structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. (A) It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the 2nd operation part in the case of being non-induction state, It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the 2nd operation part in the case of (b) induction state. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view for demonstrating the internal structure of a distribution prize device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for the etc. lottery. (A) It is a time chart which shows the operation mode of the distribution winning combination machine in the 1st distribution execution mode, and is a time chart which shows the operation mode of the distribution winning combination machine in (B) 2nd distribution execution mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the flow of the game in this pachinko machine, and the display content in a symbol display apparatus. It is an explanatory view for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device in (a), (b) game times, the winning winning period of the through winning portion for distribution, and the distribution execution mode. (A) It is a time chart which shows the execution mode of the opening / closing execution mode which generate | occur | produced from 1st distribution execution mode, (B) It is a time chart which shows the execution aspect of the opening / closing execution mode which generate | occur | produced from 2nd distribution execution mode. It is a flowchart which shows the main process in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure electric power control process in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure change start process in main side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows timer interruption processing in sound side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the table setting process in sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows V interruption processing in display side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process in the special figure change in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process in process of special figure determination in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for waiting for distribution in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for distribution start in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for distribution in main side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows distribution end processing in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the electric power start process in the main side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows processing under special power release in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the processing in the special electric power closure in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric power completion | finish process in main side MPU. (A)-(j) It is a time chart which shows a mode that a game advances. (A), (B) It is a time chart which shows the operation | movement aspect of the distribution winning combination apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows processing for distribution standby performed by main side MPU in a 3rd embodiment. (A) It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of main side ROM in a 4th embodiment, (b) It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of a classification table, (c) It corresponds to each result. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of a table group. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure change start process in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for waiting for distribution in main side MPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of a distribution table. It is a flow chart which shows distribution end processing in main side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows game state transition processing in main side MPU. (A) It is an explanatory view for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device corresponding to the gaming state in which the equivalence determination process and the distribution determination process are executed using the second high probability table group, (b) It is an explanatory view for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device corresponding to the game state where the yes or no determination process and the distribution determination process are executed using the low probability table group or the fifth high probability table group. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transfer processing performed by the main side MPU in 5th Embodiment. (A) Probability determination probability probability diagram is an explanatory view for explaining the winning probability of the probability determination process that can be selected in the lottery process, (b) of the distribution determination process may be selected in the probability lottery process of distribution determination It is an explanatory view for explaining a winning probability. It is a flow chart which shows processing under special figure decision performed by main side MPU in a 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st game state shift processing in main side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd game state shift processing in main side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st game state shift processing performed by main side MPU in a 7th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd game state shift processing in main side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the kind of hit result in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for distribution in main side MPU.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as "pachinko machine"), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing the main configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. In addition, in FIG. 2, the structure in the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is abbreviate | omitted for convenience.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a gaming machine main body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in the forward direction. . The outer frame 11 is configured by connecting wooden plate members to four sides, and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility. In the pachinko machine 10, the outer frame 11 is not an essential component, and the outer frame 11 may be provided on an island facility of the game hall.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. ing. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported relative to the outer frame 11. In detail, the inner frame 13 is pivotable forward with the left side as the pivoting base end and the right side as the pivoting tip side in front view.

  A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13 and can be pivoted forward with the left side as a pivoting base end and the right side as a pivoting tip side in a front view. In addition, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13 and can be rotated backward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip end side in a front view.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at its rotating tip, and has a function to lock the gaming machine main body 12 against the outer frame 11 so as not to be opened, and The door frame 14 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 so as not to be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation on a cylinder lock 16 provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlocking key.

  Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

  The inner frame 13 mainly includes a resin base 21 whose outer shape is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 22 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 21. A game board 23 is removably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 23 is made of plywood, and the game area PA formed on the front face of the game board 23 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 22 of the resin base 21.

  The configuration of the game board 23 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 23.

  The inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 23 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26 guide means Guide rails are configured as. The game balls fired from the game ball launch mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window holes 22 in the resin base 21 are guided to the top of the game area PA by the guide rails.

  Incidentally, the game ball launch mechanism 27 includes a launch rail 27a extending toward the guide rail, a ball feed device 27b for supplying game balls stored in an upper plate 75a described later onto the launch rail 27a, and a launch rail 27a. And a solenoid 27c, which is an electric actuator that causes the game ball supplied to the control unit to shoot toward the guide rail. By rotating the launch operation device (or launch handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14, the solenoid 27c is driven and controlled, and the gaming ball is launched.

  The game board 23 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. In each opening, a general winning portion 31, a first operating portion 32, a second operating portion 33, a special drawing through winning portion 34, a distribution through winning portion 35, a distribution winning device 36, a special electric winning device 37, variable A display unit 41, a special drawing unit 42, a drawing unit 43 and the like are provided.

  Even if the special drawing through winning portion 34 and the distribution through winning portion 35 enter the ball, the game balls are not paid out. On the other hand, when entering the ball to any of the general winning portion 31, the first operating portion 32, the second operating portion 33, the distribution winning device 36 and the special power winning device 37, the number of game media usable by the player is The payout of a predetermined number of game balls is executed to increase the number of game balls. With regard to the number of winning balls, specifically, when entering the general winning portion 31 occurs, the payout of the ten gaming balls is executed, and when entering the first operating portion 32 occurs. When the payout of three game balls is executed and the entry to the second operation unit 33 occurs, the payout of one game ball is executed and the entry to the sorting winning device 36 occurs If 15 balls are paid out and the special power winning device 37 enters the ball, the same 15 payouts as if the ball into the sorting winning device 36 occurs Is executed.

  As will be described later, the distribution winning device 36 is provided with a discharge passage area 65b and a V prize passage area 65c, and the gaming balls entered into the distribution winning device 36 are the discharge passage area 65b and the V prize passage It will pass through any of the areas 65c, but even if the game ball passes through either the discharge passage area 65b or the V prize passage area 65c, payout of the same number (specifically, 15) of game balls is executed Be done. Further, the number of winning balls may be arbitrary. For example, the number of winning balls of the first operating unit 32 and the second operating unit 33 may be the same, and the number of winning balls of the sorting winning device 36 is the special electric winning The number of winning balls of the device 37 may be more or less.

  In addition, an out port 23a is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 23, and game balls which did not enter the various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 23a. Further, on the game board 23, a large number of nails 23b are implanted to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members such as a windmill are disposed.

  Here, entering the ball means that the gaming ball passes through the predetermined opening, and not only the aspect of being ejected from the gaming area PA after passing through the opening, but also from the gaming area PA after passing through the opening Also included is an aspect of continuing the flow of the game area PA without being discharged. However, in the following description, the general winning portion 31, the first operating portion 32, the second operating portion 33, and the special figure through winning portion 34, in order to distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 23a clearly. The entry of the game balls to the distribution through winning portion 35, the distribution winning device 36 and the special power winning device 37 is also expressed as a winning.

  The variable display unit 41 is provided so as to include the central portion of the game area PA. Due to the peripheral edge of the variable display unit 41 projecting forward of the pachinko machine 10 beyond the surface of the game board 23, an area is defined in which the game balls fired in the game area PA can flow down. More specifically, the upper area PA1 which is an area above the predetermined height position of the variable display unit 41 in the game area PA, and the upper area PA1 are continuous with the upper area PA1 below the variable display unit 41. A left area PA2 which is an area on the left side, a right area PA3 which is an area which is continuous with the upper area PA1 below and which is an area on the right of the variable display unit 41, a left area PA2 and a right area PA3 On the other hand, it is divided into a lower area PA4 which is a lower area than the variable display unit 41, which is continuous below the area.

  When the player operates the firing operation device 28 with the first range of rotation amount less than the reference rotation amount as the first firing operation, the game ball is on the left side of the lateral center position in the upper area PA1. Flow out. In this case, the gaming balls flow down in the order of the upper area PA1 → the left area PA2 → the lower area PA4. On the other hand, the player operates the launch operation device 28 in the second range of rotation amount equal to or greater than the reference rotation amount as the second launch operation, so that the upper side area PA1 is more to the right than the lateral center position. The game balls run off. In this case, the gaming balls flow down in the order of the upper area PA1 → the right area PA3 → the lower area PA4. That is, the player can play the game ball to flow down the left area PA2 of the left area PA2 and the right area PA3 by adjusting the turning operation amount of the launch operation device 28, and the right area It is possible to play the game so that the game ball flows down PA3. Incidentally, when the operation of the firing operation device 28 is performed with the maximum amount of rotation, the gaming ball flows down in the order of the upper area PA1 → the right area PA3 → the lower area PA4.

  The first operating unit 32 is installed in the lower area PA4. The first operating portion 32 is open upward, and no member such as an open / close member for blocking the game ball from entering the first operating portion 32 is provided. And, in the situation where the game ball is fired in the same manner, the winning probability to the first operation part 32 is constant without depending on the game state. In other words, in the first operating unit 32, gaming balls that flow down the game area PA toward the first operating unit 32 can always enter the game. In addition, the first operating portion 32 is disposed directly below the stage 41 a formed in the variable display unit 41, and is a gaming ball that has flowed onto the stage 41 a through a guiding passage formed in the variable display unit 41. The game ball discharged from the center of the stage 41 a to the outside of the variable display unit 41 is easy to win the first operating portion 32. The first operation unit 32 is provided with a detection sensor 32a, and the game sensor that has won the first operation unit 32 is detected by the detection sensor 32a.

  Here, although the first operating unit 32 is provided in the lower area PA4 as described above, the game in which the right area PA3 is made to flow upstream toward the right area PA3 with respect to the first operating unit 32 A restricting nail 23 c is provided to make it impossible for the ball to reach the first operating portion 32. Further, the inlet of the induction passage to the stage 41a is provided for the left side area PA2, and is not provided for the right side area PA3. With these configurations, when the firing operation device 28 is operated such that the gaming ball flows down the left area PA2, winning on the first operation unit 32 is possible, but the gaming ball flows down the right area PA3. As described above, when the launch operation device 28 is operated, it is impossible to win the first operation unit 32. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game ball flows down the right side area PA3 by providing the entrance of the guiding passage to the stage 41a with respect to the right side area PA3 without providing the restriction nail 23c. Even if the firing operation device 28 is operated as described above, winning of the first operating unit 32 may be possible.

  The second operating unit 33 is installed in the right side area PA3. That is, when the game operating device 28 is operated such that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, the second operation unit 33 can not win a game, and the game operation moves so that the game ball flows down the right area PA3. If the device 28 is operated, a prize can be won.

  The configuration of the second actuation unit 33 will be described with reference to FIG. 4 (a). FIG. 4A is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the second operation portion 33 in the non-reception state. The second operation unit 33 has a base unit 51 in which a discharge passage 53 for discharging the game balls flowing from the game area PA to the rear of the game board 23 is formed, and a game ball flowing down the game area PA is discharged 53 And a guiding unit 52 for guiding the user. The inlet 53a of the discharge passage 53 has an opening area equal to or more than one game ball, and is opened forward of the pachinko machine 10. A detection sensor 54 is provided on the outlet 53b side of the discharge passage 53, and the game sensor that has won the second operation unit 33 is detected by the detection sensor 54.

  The guiding unit 52 receives from below the gaming ball flowing down the front area of the entrance 53a in the gaming area PA, and guides the gaming ball received into the discharge passage 53 into the discharge passage 53 and into the discharge passage 53. The guide drive unit 56 for displacing the guide member 55 between the initial position where the guidance of the gaming ball is not possible and the guidance position where the guidance is possible, and the situation where the guide member 55 is disposed at the initial position Are disposed at the blocking position to block the flow of gaming balls into the discharge passage 53, and are disposed at the non-blocking position not to block the flow of gaming balls into the discharge passage 53 in the situation where the guide member 55 is disposed at the guiding position. And a blocking member 57. The guide member 55 and the blocking member 57 are opposed to each other at a predetermined interval in the longitudinal direction such that the guide member 55 is at the lower side. A transmission unit 58 is provided to transmit the driving force of the guide drive unit 56 to the guide member 55 and the blocking member 57.

  When the guide drive unit 56 is in the non-driven state, the guide member 55 is disposed at the initial position by the biasing force of biasing means such as a spring (not shown), and the blocking member 57 is disposed at the blocking position. In this case, the guide member 55 and the blocking member 57 are entirely embedded in the discharge passage 53 and do not protrude into the game area PA. Thus, the gaming ball flowing down the front area of the entrance 53a of the discharge passage 53 in the game area PA is not guided into the discharge passage 53 by the guide member 55 and the blocking member 57, that is, the game ball is the second The game area PA flows downward without entering the operating unit 33. Further, since the blocking member 57 is disposed at the blocking position, the substantial opening area of the inlet 53 a of the discharge passage 53 is less than one game ball. Thereby, in the situation where guide member 55 is arranged in the initial position, it becomes possible to certainly block entering of the game ball to the 2nd operation part 33.

  When the guide drive unit 56 is driven, the guide member 55 and the blocking member 57 are displaced against the biasing force of the biasing means, and the guide member 55 is disposed at the guiding position and the blocking member 57 is not It is placed in the blocking position. FIG. 4B is a vertical cross-sectional view of the second operation part 33 in the induction state.

  When the guide member 55 is disposed at the guiding position, the tip end side of the guide member 55 protrudes from the entrance 53 a of the discharge passage 53 toward the game area PA. This protrusion amount is such that it is possible to receive from below the gaming ball flowing down the front area of the entrance 53a in the gaming area PA. The upper end of the guide member 55 is inclined downward toward the entrance 53 a of the discharge passage 53, so that the gaming ball received from below at the end of the guide member 55 is the upper surface of the guide member 55. To be guided into the discharge passage 53. In addition, when the blocking member 57 is disposed at the non-blocking position, the tip of the blocking member 57 is displaced so as to be at a position above the blocking position. The ball flows into the discharge passage 53 without interfering with the blocking member 57. As a result, when the guide drive unit 56 is in the drive state, the game ball flowing down the front area of the entrance 53 a in the game area PA enters the second operation unit 33. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the guide unit 56 is in the non-driving state, the guide member 55 is disposed at the initial position, and the blocking member 57 is disposed at the blocking position. The closed state of the portion 33, the non-receiving state of the second operating portion 33, the non-inducing state of the second operating portion 33), the guide The state in which the position is placed in the non-blocking position is referred to as the guiding state of the guiding unit 52 (or the opening state of the second operating portion 33, the receiving state of the second operating portion 33, the guiding state of the second operating portion 33).

  The second operation unit 33 includes a cover member 59 provided to face the inlet 53 a of the discharge passage 53 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The cover member 59 is formed in a gate shape so as to form a passage 59a in the vertical direction in the front area of the entrance 53a in the game area PA, and the game ball passing simultaneously through the front area of the entrance 53a is It is provided so as to restrict movement to the front of the pachinko machine 10 and the movement to the lateral direction of the pachinko game machine while limiting to the individual. Thereby, it is prevented that a plurality of gaming balls are simultaneously induced into the discharge passage 53 of the second actuation portion 33 when the induction unit 52 of the second actuation portion 33 is in the induction state, It becomes possible to reliably guide gaming balls passing through the front area of the entrance 53a in the discharge passage 53 in the guiding state.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the special drawing through winning portion 34 and the distribution through winning portion 35 are arranged in parallel in the vertical direction above the second operation portion 33 in the right side area PA3. That is, the special drawing through winning portion 34 and the distribution through winning portion 35 can not be won when the game operating device is operated such that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, and the right side area PA3 When the firing operation device 28 is operated so that the gaming ball flows down, winning is possible. The special drawing through winning portion 34 and the distribution through winning portion 35 have through holes penetrating in the vertical direction, and the vertical of the special drawing through winning portion 34 so that these through holes are on the same axis. The distribution through winning portion 35 is provided at the lower position. The distance between the special drawing through winning portion 34 and the distributing through winning portion 35 is about one game ball, and the through hole of the special drawing through winning portion 34 and the distributing through winning No obstacle member such as a nail 23 b is provided between the through hole of the portion 35. As a result, the gaming ball having passed through the special drawing through winning portion 34 in the vertical direction reliably passes through the distribution through winning portion 35. In addition, the second operating portion 33 is provided at a position vertically below the distribution through winning portion 35, and further, on the downstream side of the second operating portion 33 in the right side area PA3, the special electric winning device 37 and the swing A minute winning device 36 is provided. Therefore, it is possible for the game ball that has won the special drawing through winning portion 34 or the distribution through winning portion 35 to win the second operating portion 33, the special electric winning device 37 or the distributing winning device 36. .

  The right side area PA3 where the second operation unit 33, the special drawing through winning unit 34, and the distribution through winning unit 35 are collectively arranged is the pachinko machine 10 forward of the pachinko machine 10 than the board of the game board 23 on the left in the variable display unit 41. The right side is defined by a restricting wall provided on the resin base 21 of the inner frame 13 and projecting forward of the pachinko machine 10 beyond the board surface of the game board 23. The right side area PA3 is set to have a smaller dimension in the lateral direction than the lower area PA4, and the dimension in the lateral direction is such that it is impossible to arrange the ball entry devices of gaming balls in the lateral direction at the same height position. It has become. This makes it possible to limit the flow-down trajectory of the game ball flowing down the right side area PA3 to a predetermined range, and the game to the second operation portion 33, the special view through winning portion 34, and the distribution through winning portion 35. It is easy for the ball to enter the ball.

  The arrangement mode of the plurality of nails 23b on the upstream side of the special figure through winning portion 34 in the right side area PA3 is set to guide the gaming ball flowing down the right side area PA3 to the special figure through winning portion 34 . As a result, the gaming ball flowing down the right side area PA3 can easily enter the special view through winning portion 34, and the second operation portion 33 and the special operation through win portion 34 can be easily entered. It is easy to enter the through winning combination section 35 for distribution.

  The special drawing through winning portion 34 is provided with a detection sensor 34a, and the gaming sensor that has won the special drawing through winning portion 34 is detected by the detection sensor 34a. Further, the distribution through winning portion 35 is provided with a detection sensor 35a, and the detection sensor 35a detects a game ball that has won the distribution through winning portion 35.

  The guidance unit 52 of the second operation unit 33 is switched from the non-induction state to the induction state on the basis of the winning on the special drawing through winning portion 34. Specifically, the internal lottery is performed triggered by the winning of the special drawing through winning portion 34, and the spread of the drawing unit 43 provided at the lower left corner which is an area where the game ball does not pass in the game area PA. Variation display of a pattern is performed on the figure display unit 43a. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the winning of the guiding execution state and the stopping result corresponding to the result is displayed and the variation display of the pattern in the spread map display unit 43a is ended, the processing shifts to the guiding execution state. In the guiding execution state, the guiding unit 52 is in the guiding state in a predetermined manner.

  The common view display unit 43a is configured of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. In this case, although it is impossible to perform complicated display such as a symbol display device 44 described later in the common view display unit 43a, it is possible to reduce the processing load for display control of the common view display unit 43a. Become. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display. In addition, as a pattern displayed on the common view display unit 43a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of colors May be displayed.

  In the common drawing unit 43, a common drawing reservation display unit 43b is provided at a position adjacent to the common drawing display unit 43a. The number of game balls winning in the special drawing through winning portion 34 is held up to a maximum of four, and the number of held balls is displayed by lighting of the general drawing hold display portion 43b.

  Incidentally, the display range of the common view display portion 43a is narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 44 described later. Furthermore, the display ranges for both the common view display unit 43a and the common view suspension display unit 43b are also narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 44. As a result, the player can pay more attention to the symbol display device 44 than the common drawing display unit 43a and the common drawing suspension display unit 43b.

  A winning lottery is performed based on the occurrence of a winning on the first operating unit 32 or the second operating unit 33. When the winning lottery is performed, the special drawing unit 42 displays the variation of the pattern, and finally, the result corresponding to the result of the winning lottery is displayed.

  More specifically, the special drawing unit 42 is provided with a special drawing display unit 42 a. In the special view display unit 42a, the change lottery of the pattern is performed by performing the winning lottery based on the occurrence of the winning on the first operating unit 32 or the second operating unit 33. Then, the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. Variation display of a pattern is started by the special view display unit 42a, and until the variation display of the pattern is ended by displaying a predetermined result corresponds to one game round.

  The special view display unit 42a is configured of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. In this case, although it is impossible to perform complicated display such as a symbol display device 44 described later in the special view display unit 42a, it is possible to reduce the processing load for display control of the special view display unit 42a. Become. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display. Moreover, as a design displayed on the special view display unit 42a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of colors May be displayed.

  In the special drawing unit 42, a special drawing reservation display part 42b is provided at a position adjacent to the special drawing display part 42a. The number of game balls played in the first operating unit 32 or the second operating unit 33 is held at a maximum of four, and the number of the held holdings is displayed by lighting of the special view holding display unit 42b. The display range of the special view display unit 42 a is narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 44 described later. Further, the display range of the entire of the special view display unit 42 a and the special view reserve display unit 42 b is also narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 44. As a result, the player can pay more attention to the symbol display device 44 than the special view display unit 42a and the special view suspension display unit 42b.

  When the variable display of the pattern is performed in the special view display unit 42 a, the display effect is performed in accordance with that in the symbol display device 44 provided in the variable display unit 41. The symbol display device 44 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The display contents of the symbol display device 44 will be described in detail later. The symbol display device 44 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display surface such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device or a CRT, and is a dot matrix display. May be

  If the winning result based on the winning on the first operating unit 32 or the second operating unit 33 is hit, and the game corresponding to the hit is finished, the winning on the through winning portion for distribution 35 is considered effective. Become. Then, when the winning of the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs in the winning effective period, the mode shifts to a sorting execution mode in which a winning on the sorting winning device 36 is possible. In the case where a winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs during the winning effective period and a shift to the distribution execution mode occurs, the winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 is invalidated again.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the distribution winning device 36 is provided at a position lower than the second operation portion 33 in the right side area PA3. That is, when the game operating device 28 is operated such that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, the distribution winning device 36 can not win a game, and the game operation moves so that the game ball flows down the right area PA3. If the device 28 is operated, a prize can be won.

  The configuration of the distribution winning device 36 will be described with reference to FIG. 5 in addition to FIG. FIG. 5 is a longitudinal sectional view for explaining the internal configuration of the distribution winning device 36. As shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the distribution winning device 36 is provided with a distribution inlet 61 of a size that allows the game ball to pass, and the game ball can not pass through the distribution inlet 61 and the closed state and the game A distribution side opening / closing member 62 is provided to switch to an open state in which the ball can pass. The distribution side opening / closing member 62 is driven in an open state by being driven through a link mechanism (not shown) by a drive unit 63 for the distribution inlet.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the gaming balls having won in the distribution inlet 61 are led out to a branch passage 65 formed in the base body 64 of the distribution winning device 36. The branch passage 65 is an upstream passage region 65a set so that the passage direction is inclined downward in the lateral direction from the inlet portion of the branch passage 65 to the middle position of the branch passage 65, and the upstream passage region 65a A discharge passage area 65b which is set in such a manner that the passage direction is set vertically downward at a downstream end of the lower stream side, and the game is performed on a side different from the discharge passage area 65b. And a V winning passage area 65c for guiding a ball. In this case, the upstream passage area 65a is perpendicular to the passage direction because the dimension in the direction orthogonal to the passage direction is equal to or greater than one game ball and less than two game balls. The game balls are prevented from passing through the upstream passage area 65a in a state where the plurality of game balls are lined up. Accordingly, the plurality of gaming balls are prevented from simultaneously reaching the branch position to the V prize passage area 65c in the discharge path area 65b.

  A switching piece 66 for guiding gaming balls having flowed into the discharge passage area 65b to the V pay passage area 65c is provided at a branch point to the V prize passage area 65c in the discharge passage area 65b. The switching piece 66 is rotatably supported in an area opposite to the V prize passage area 65c with respect to the discharge path area 65b in the base body 64, and the whole is evacuated outside the discharge path area 65b. It is displaceable between the position and the V guiding position projecting into the discharge passage area 65b. The driving force of the switching drive unit 67 is transmitted to the switching piece 66 through a transmission unit (not shown). The switching piece 66 is disposed at the retracted position by the biasing force of biasing means such as a spring (not shown) when the switching drive portion 67 is in the non-driving state, and the switching drive portion 67 is in the driving state. The switching piece 66 is displaced against the biasing force and disposed at the V guiding position.

  When the switching piece 66 is disposed at the retracted position, the gaming balls having flowed into the branch passage 65 flow down the discharge passage region 65b without being guided to the V pay passage region 65c. The gaming ball is discharged to the rear of the game board 23 after being detected by the count detection sensor 68 provided downstream of the branch position of the switching piece 66 in the discharge passage area 65b. On the other hand, when the switching piece 66 is disposed at the V-induction position, the gaming ball flowing into the branch passage 65 is received by the switching piece 66 from below. The upper surface of the switching piece 66 in the state of being disposed at the V guiding position is inclined downward toward the V winning passage area 65c. As a result, the gaming ball received from below by the switching piece 66 flows into the V prize passage area 65c by its own weight and flows down the V prize passage area 65c. Then, the gaming ball is discharged to the rear of the game board 23 after being detected by the V prize detection sensor 69 provided in the V prize passage area 65 c.

  Whether the game ball is detected by the count detection sensor 68 or the game ball is detected by the V prize detection sensor 69, the same number of award balls corresponding to the distribution prize device 36 are paid out Be done. In addition, when the V winning detection sensor 69 detects a game ball in the distribution execution mode, the open / close execution mode is generated after the distribution execution mode. On the other hand, when the distribution execution mode is ended without the game ball being detected by the V prize detection sensor 69, the open / close execution mode is not generated.

  During the distribution execution mode, the distribution display unit 42c provided in the special drawing unit 42 performs variable display of the pattern. In detail, about the period when the variation display of the pattern is performed in the distribution display portion 42c, the winning result is displayed in the special view display portion 42a, and the winning period is valid when the winning in the distribution through winning portion 35 is effective. When it is started, the variable display of the pattern is started in the distribution display unit 42c. Then, when the distribution execution mode ends, the variable display of the pattern is ended. In this case, when the detection of the game ball in the V winning detection sensor 69 is generated in the distribution execution mode, the variation display of the pattern in the distribution display portion 42c is ended with the stop result at the time of V winning being displayed. In the distribution execution mode, when the detection of the game ball in the V winning detection sensor 69 is not generated, the variation display of the pattern in the distribution display portion 42c is ended in a state where the stop result at the time of non V winning is displayed. Be done. If the stop result at the time of V prize is displayed, then the open / close execution mode is generated, and if the stop result at the time of non-V prize is displayed, the open / close execution triggered by the execution of the current distribution execution mode There is no transition to mode.

  The distribution display unit 42c is configured of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. In this case, although it is impossible to perform complicated display such as the symbol display device 44 in the distribution display unit 42c, it becomes possible to reduce the processing load for display control of the distribution display unit 42c. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display. In addition, as a pattern displayed on the distribution display unit 42c, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of colors May be displayed.

  The display range of the distribution display unit 42 c is narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 44. As a result, it becomes possible to increase the player's attention to the symbol display device 44 more than the distribution display unit 42c.

  In the open / close execution mode, it is possible to win a prize to the special power winning device 37. As shown in FIG. 3, the special power winning device 37 is provided below the second operation unit 33 in the right side area PA <b> 3 and above the distribution winning device 36. That is, when the game operating device 28 is operated such that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, the special power winning device 37 can not win a game, and the game operating device moves down the right area PA3. If 28 is operated, winning is possible.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the special power winning device 37 has a large winning opening 37a of a size through which the game ball can pass, and the closed state and gaming ball where the gaming ball can not pass through the large winning opening 37a. Is switched to an open state where it can pass through. The special charge side opening / closing member 37 b is driven to open by being driven through a link mechanism (not shown) by a special charge drive unit 37 c. The special game winning device 37 is provided with a game ball passage so that the large winning opening 37a is an entrance portion, and the special ball detection sensor provided in the game ball passage is the game ball that has flowed into the gaming ball passage through the large winning hole 37a. After being detected by 37d, it is discharged to the rear of the game board 23.

  A front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame 13 formed by attaching the gaming board 23 of the above configuration to the resin base 21. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 71 that enables the player to view substantially the entire game area PA from the front. The window portion 71 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 72 is fitted therein. The window panel 72 is formed to be colorless and transparent by glass, but is not limited to this and may be formed to be colorless and transparent by a synthetic resin, and the game area PA may be made through the window panel 72 from the front of the pachinko machine 10 If it is visible, it may be colored and transparent.

  The display light emitting unit 73 is provided above the window unit 71. In addition, a pair of left and right speaker units 74 to which sound effects and the like according to the game state are output are provided. Moreover, below the window part 71, the upper side bulging part 75 and the lower side bulging part 76 which bulged to the front side are arranged in parallel up and down. An upper plate 75a opened upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 75, and a lower plate 76a opening similarly upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 76. The upper tray 75a has a function for temporarily storing game balls paid out from a later described payout device and guiding the game balls to the game ball launch mechanism 27 side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 76a has a function of storing gaming balls that have become surplus in the upper tray 75a.

  Next, the configuration of the back side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 2, on the back of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 23), a main control device 81 which controls main control of the game is mounted. The main control unit 81 has a main control board housed in a board box. The substrate box may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of the opening or a trace structure for leaving a trace of the opening. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box can not be separably joined, and the structure of the joining portion which requires destruction of a predetermined portion at the time of the separation, and peeling by the adhesive layer remaining at the adhesive A configuration is conceivable in which a seal seal that leaves a trace of what has been done is applied across the boundaries between multiple case bodies. Moreover, as a trace structure, the structure which apply | coats an adhesive agent with respect to the boundary between several case bodies which comprise a board | substrate box can be considered.

  A back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main control device 81. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 82 formed of a synthetic resin having transparency, and to the back pack 82, a dispensing mechanism portion 83 and a control device collecting unit 84 are attached.

  The payout mechanism unit 83 includes a tank 85 to which the game balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 86 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 85. The game balls paid out from the payout device 86 are discharged to the upper tray 75a or the lower tray 76a through the payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 86. In addition, for example, a main pack power of, for example, 24 AC, is supplied to the dispensing mechanism portion 83, and a back pack substrate having a power switch for performing an ON operation and an OFF operation of the power is mounted.

  The control device set unit 84 generates and outputs predetermined power required by various control devices and the like as a payout control device 87 having a function of controlling the payout device 86 and is accompanied by the operation of the discharge operation device 28 by the player. A power supply and launch control device 88 is provided to control the launch of the game balls. The payout control device 87 and the power supply / discharge control device 88 are disposed so as to be stacked back and forth so that the payout control device 87 is located behind the pachinko machine 10.

<Electric Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control device 81 comprises a main control board 91 which is responsible for main control of the game. An MPU 92 is mounted on the main control board 91. The MPU 92 is a ROM 93 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 92 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. A RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and various counter circuits as a random number generator are incorporated. The fact that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 92 is not an essential configuration, and each may be configured as an individual chip. The same applies to the MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 81.

  The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. The power failure monitoring board 95 provided in the main control device 81 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92, and the payout control device 87 is connected. The power and emission control device 88 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power failure monitoring substrate 95, and power is supplied to the MPU 92 through the power failure monitoring substrate 95.

  Various sensors such as various winning detection sensors 32a, 34a, 35a, 37d, 54, 68, 69 (hereinafter, various winning detection sensors 32a to 69) are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. The various winning detection sensors 32a to 69 include a detection sensor 32a provided in the first operation unit 32, a detection sensor 54 provided in the second operation unit 33, and a detection sensor 34a provided in the special drawing through winning unit 34. , Detection sensor 35a provided in distribution through winning portion 35, count detection sensor 68 and V prize detection sensor 69 provided in distribution winning device 36, and special electric winning detection sensor 37d provided in special electric winning device 37 Is included. Besides the above, a detection sensor provided in the general winning portion 31 is included. Based on the detection results of the various winning detection sensors 32a to 69, the MPU 92 performs a winning determination on each winning entry ball. Further, in the MPU 92, various lottery is executed based on the winning on the first operating unit 32 and the second operating unit 33.

  The power failure monitoring board 95, the payout control device 87, and the sound emission control device 101 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92. For example, a winning ball command is output to the payout control device 87 based on the result of the winning determination on the winning support ball entry unit. When the payout control device 87 receives the prize ball command, the payout control device 87 is driven to control so that the number of gaming balls designated by the prize ball command is paid out. The voice light emission control apparatus 101 outputs various commands such as a variation command, a type command, and an opening command.

  The guide drive unit 56 switches the induction unit 52 of the second operation unit 33 between the non-induction state and the induction state on the output side of the MPU 92 (in other words, opens and closes the inlet 53 a of the second operation unit 33). , A drive section 63 for the distribution inlet for opening and closing the distribution side opening / closing member 62 of the distribution winning device 36, and a switching for displacing the switching piece 66 of the distribution winning device 36 between the retracted position and the V guiding position A drive unit 67, a drive unit 37c for special power for opening and closing the special voltage side opening / closing member 37b of the special power winning device 37, a special view unit 42 and a drawing unit 43 are connected. Incidentally, the special view display unit 42 a, the special view hold display unit 42 b and the distribution display unit 42 c are provided in the special view unit 42, but all of them are connected to the output side of the MPU 92. Similarly, although the common drawing unit 43 is provided with a common drawing display unit 43 a and a common drawing reservation display unit 43 b, all of these are connected to the output side of the MPU 92. The main control substrate 91 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 92 executes drive control of various driving units through the driver circuits.

  That is, when the induction state of the induction unit 52 is won, the MPU 92 outputs a drive signal to the guide drive unit 56 such that the induction unit 52 is in the induction state, and the return condition to the non-induction state is satisfied. The output of the drive signal is stopped to return the induction unit 52 to the non-induction state. Further, when the opening start condition of the distribution inlet 61 is satisfied in the distribution execution mode, the MPU 92 outputs a drive signal to the distribution inlet driver 63 so that the distribution inlet 61 is in the open state, When the closing condition of the distribution inlet 61 is satisfied, the output of the drive signal is stopped to close the distribution inlet 61. Further, when the induction start condition to the V winning aisle area 65c is satisfied in the distribution execution mode, the MPU 92 outputs a drive signal to the switching drive section 67 so that the switching piece 66 is disposed at the V induction position. When the condition for returning to the retracted position is satisfied, the output of the drive signal is stopped and the switching piece 66 is returned to the retracted position. Further, when the opening start condition of the big winning opening 37a is satisfied in the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 sends a drive signal to the drive portion 37c for special power so that the big winning opening 37a becomes an open state where the game ball can be won. When the closing condition of the special winning opening 37a is satisfied, the output of the drive signal is stopped to put the special winning opening 37a in a closed state where the winning of the gaming ball is not possible. Further, in each winning a prize, the winning period of the distribution through winning portion 35, and the distribution execution mode, display control of the special drawing unit 42 is executed in the MPU 92. Further, when the lottery result as to whether or not to bring the guiding unit 52 into the guiding state is specified, the display control of the common drawing unit 43 is executed in the MPU 92.

  The power failure monitoring board 95 relays the main control board 91 and the power supply and emission control device 88, and monitors the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply and emission control device 88. The payout control device 87 performs payout control of the winning balls and the rental balls by the payout device 86 based on the winning ball command input from the MPU 92 of the main control device 81.

  The power supply and emission control device 88 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, necessary operation power is generated for each of the main controller 81, the payout control device 87, and the like, and the generated operation power is supplied.

  Specifically, with regard to the configuration for supplying the operation power, the power and emission control device 88 is provided with a power-on during power-on 88 a and a power-on during power-off 88 b. The power-on power-supply unit 88a is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply in a game hall or the like, and generates operating power and supplies the generated operating power when external power is supplied from the commercial power supply. Have a function to The power-off power supply unit 88b is formed of a capacitor, and the power supplied from the power-on power supply unit 88a when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in the ON state (when power is supplied from the external power supply). It is charged by In addition, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is off or when the power is cut off in the commercial power supply (when the power supply from the external power supply is cut off), the power is cut off from the power supply section 88b. Backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the control device 81 and the RAM (not shown) of the payout control device 87. Therefore, even in this situation, the information stored in the RAM 94 of the main control device 81 and the RAM of the payout control device 87 is not erased while the backup power is being supplied from the power-off power supply unit 88b. It is kept in memory.

  Here, the RAM 94 of the main control device 81 temporarily stores information on the current gaming state and the progress of the game, and the RAM of the payout control device 87 temporarily stores information on the number of unpaid award balls. Be done. In this case, even if there is no power supply from the power-on during power-on by the backup power being supplied to the RAM from the power-off during power supply 88b as described above, the current game is It becomes possible to store and hold the state, the progress of the game and the prize ball information of the unpaid for a predetermined period. On the other hand, backup power is not supplied to the sound emission control apparatus 101 and the display control apparatus 111 from the power-off during power supply unit 88 b. Therefore, the information stored in the RAM 105 of the audio light emission control device 101 and the RAM 115 of the display control device 111 is not backed up, and is destroyed or the power supply from the power supply unit for power on 88a is interrupted. It is erased.

  The capacity of the power-off power supply unit 88b is relatively large, and the information stored in the RAM 94 of the main control device 81 before power-off is held within a predetermined period (for example, one day or two days). Ru. The power-off-use power supply unit 88b is not limited to a capacitor, and may be a battery, a non-rechargeable battery, or the like.

  The power supply and emission control device 88 is provided with a power supply unit for power failure (not shown) different from the power supply unit for power interruption 88 b. The power supply and discharge control device 88 discharges from the power supply for power failure even after the power of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, for a sufficient time for execution of the power failure process described later. The output of 5 volts, which is the drive power supply of the control system, is maintained at a normal value. As a result, the main control device 81 or the like can execute and complete the power failure process normally.

  The power supply and emission control device 88 is provided with a emission control unit 88c in addition to the various power supply units 88a and 88b. A touch sensor 28a, a push sensor 28b, and a variable resistor 28c built in the launch operation device 28 are electrically connected to the launch control unit 88c.

  The touch sensor 28a has a built-in capacitor, and when the player's hand comes in contact with the outer surface of the operation handle to change the capacitance of the capacitor, the control unit 88c emits a predetermined electric signal corresponding to the handle operation detection. Output to The launch control unit 88c recognizes that the player's hand is in contact with the outer surface of the operation handle by receiving the predetermined electrical signal. In addition, the emission control unit 88c recognizes the presence or absence of the operation of the emission stop switch of the emission control device 28 in accordance with the electrical signal received from the push sensor 28b, and the operation handle in accordance with the electrical signal received through the variable resistor 28c. Understand the amount of rotation operation of the

  The launch control unit 88 c transmits a condition satisfaction signal of a predetermined signal form to the MPU 92 of the main control device 81 when a predetermined game ball firing condition is satisfied. Specifically, the firing control unit 88c receives a signal indicating that the operation handle is touched by the player from the touch sensor 28a, and a signal indicating that the firing stop switch is not manually operated by the player. On the condition that the push sensor 28 b is received, the condition satisfaction signal (signal corresponding to the condition satisfaction) of HI level is continuously transmitted to the MPU 92. When any of the above signals is not received, a low level condition satisfaction signal (a signal not corresponding to the condition satisfaction) is transmitted to the MPU 92. However, the relationship between the LOW level and the HI level may be reversed. Further, in addition to the above conditions, a condition that the ball lending device is connected to the pachinko machine 10 may be added as a condition for transmitting a condition satisfaction signal corresponding to the condition satisfaction.

  In the situation where the MPU 92 receives the HI level condition establishment signal and is permitted to launch the game ball, the launch control unit 88c transmits the HI level launch permission signal (a signal corresponding to the launch permission). Continue to send. When the MPU 92 does not receive the condition satisfaction signal of HI level from the emission control unit 88c, the MPU 92 transmits a LOW level emission permission signal (a signal not corresponding to the emission permission). The relationship between levels and HI levels may be reversed.

  When the game ball launch mechanism 27 is electrically connected and the launch control unit 88 c receives a launch permission signal of HI level from the MPU 92, the launch control unit 88 c periodically controls the game ball launch mechanism 27. In this case, in a situation where gaming balls are continuously supplied to the gaming ball firing mechanism 27, one gaming ball is fired in the gaming area PA in a specific firing cycle (specifically, 0.6 sec). . In addition, since the firing intensity is adjusted based on the signal received from the variable resistor 28c at the time of firing, the gaming ball is fired at a strength corresponding to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle.

  The sound emission control apparatus 101 includes a sound emission control substrate 102 on which the MPU 103 is mounted. The MPU 103 is a ROM 104 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 103 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 104 is executed. A certain RAM 105 and an interrupt circuit, timer circuit, data input / output circuit, etc. are incorporated. The MPU 103 drives and controls the display light emitting unit 73 and the speaker unit 74 based on the command received from the main control device 81, and transmits the command to the display control device 111.

  The display control device 111 includes a display control board 112 on which the MPU 113 is mounted. The MPU 113 is a ROM 114 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 113 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 114 is executed. A certain RAM 115, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, etc. are incorporated. The MPU 113 controls the symbol display device 44 based on the command received from the sound emission control device 101.

  In addition to the MPU 113, a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM, a video RAM, and the like are mounted on the display control board 112, although not shown. The VDP is a kind of drawing circuit which directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the symbol display device 44. The VDP intervenes in reading and writing data of the video RAM, and reads out image data to be stored in the video RAM from the character ROM at a predetermined timing and causes the symbol display device 44 to display it. The character ROM plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 44. The character ROM holds bitmapped image data of various display symbols, a color pallet table to be referred to when determining the color to be expressed in each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. The video RAM is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 44, and the display content of the symbol display device 44 is changed based on rewriting the content of the video RAM.

  In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 92, the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 of the main control unit 81 are referred to as the main MPU 92, the main ROM 93 and the main RAM 94, and the MPU 103, the ROM 104 and the RAM 105 of the sound emission control apparatus 101 The side MPU 103, the sound light side ROM 104, and the sound light side RAM 105 are referred to, and the MPU 113, the ROM 114, and the RAM 115 of the display control device 111 are referred to as a display side MPU 113, a display side ROM 114, and a display side RAM 115.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery in main side MPU 92>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lottery in the main MPU 92 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The main side MPU 92 uses various counter information at the time of the game, and the winning lottery, the setting of the display of the special view display unit 42a, the lottery of the execution mode of the distribution execution mode, the setting of the symbol display of the symbol display device 44, the common drawing display unit 43a is to be set, etc. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7, a random number counter C1 used for lottery of occurrence of a hit, and a type counter C2 used for determining a type of hit and , Distribution counter C3 used for lottery of execution mode of distribution execution mode, random number initial value counter CINI used for setting initial value of per random number counter C1, and games in special view display portion 42a and symbol display device 44 The variation type counter CS used when determining the number of variation display periods is used. Furthermore, a general charge random number counter C4 used in the drawing to determine whether or not to bring the induction unit 52 of the second operation unit 33 into the induction state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the lottery counter area 121 of the main RAM 94.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which "1" is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, returns to "0". Each counter is updated at short intervals. The numerical value information of the per-random number counter C1 and the type counter C2 is stored in the special view holding area 122 provided in the main side RAM 94 when the first operating unit 32 or the second operating unit 33 has a win. . The special view reserve area 122 includes a first area 123a, a second area 123b, a third area 123c and a fourth area 123d, and in accordance with the winning history to the first operating unit 32 or the second operating unit 33, Each numerical value information of the per-random number counter C1 and the type counter C2 is stored in any one of the areas 123a to 123d as hold information on the first special view side.

  In this case, if winnings to the first operating unit 32 or the second operating unit 33 occur a plurality of times consecutively in the first area 123a to the fourth area 123d, the first area 123a → the second area 123b → Each numerical value information is stored in time series in the order of the third area 123c → the fourth area 123d. By providing the four areas 123a to 123d as described above, the winning history of the game balls to the first operating unit 32 or the second operating unit 33 is reserved and stored up to four at maximum.

  In addition, the number that can be reserved and stored in first special view reserved area 123 is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be other plural such as two, three or five or more. , May be singular.

  In addition to the first area 123a to the fourth area 123d, a special drawing execution area 124 is provided in the special drawing reservation area 122. The special drawing execution area 124 is an area in which the suspension information of the target to be subjected to the special drawing acceptance determination, the type determination, and the like is stored when the variation display of the pattern is started on the special drawing display unit 42a. In the special drawing execution area 124, the hold information stored in the first area 123a is shifted when the variable display of the special drawing display unit 42a is started.

  Information corresponding to the distribution counter C3 is stored in the distribution execution area 125 provided in the main RAM 94 when a winning on the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs. The distribution execution area 125 is an area in which, when the distribution execution mode in the distribution winning device 36 is started, numerical information for determining the execution mode of the distribution execution mode is stored. In the execution area 125 for distribution, when a prize for the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs during a winning period during which winning for the distribution through winning portion 35 is effective, the distribution counter C3 The numerical information of is stored.

  The information corresponding to the common charge random number counter C4 is stored in the common drawing reservation area 126 provided in the main side RAM 94 when a winning for the special drawing through winning portion 34 occurs. The common drawing reservation area 126 is provided with a first area 127a, a second area 127b, a third area 127c and a fourth area 127d, and the common charge random number counter according to the winning history to the special drawing through winning portion 34. The numerical information of C4 is stored in any one of the areas 127a to 127d as hold information on the side of the drawing.

  In this case, the first area 127a → the second area 127b → the third area 127c when winnings to the special drawing through winning portion 34 occur a plurality of times consecutively in the first area 127a to the fourth area 127d. The numerical information is stored chronologically in the order of the fourth area 127d. Thus, by providing the four areas 127a to 127d, the winning history of the gaming ball to the special drawing through winning portion 34 is reserved and stored up to four at maximum.

  In addition, the number that can be reserved and stored in the common view reservation area 126 is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be other plural such as two, three, five or more, and so on It may be

  In the common drawing reservation area 126, a common drawing execution area 128 is provided. The execution area 128 for common drawing is an area in which the suspension information of the target for which the judgment for acceptance for guidance is performed is stored when the variable display is started in the common drawing display unit 43a. Specifically, when the variable display of the common drawing display unit 43a is started, the hold information stored in the first area 127a of the common drawing reservation area 126 is shifted to the execution area 128 for common drawing.

  The respective counters will be described in detail.

  First, the common charge random number counter C4 will be described. The common charge random number counter C4 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of "0 to 250" and to return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The general charge random number counter C4 is periodically updated, and the value of the general charge random number counter C4 at that time is stored in the general drawing reservation area 126 at the timing when the gaming ball has won the special drawing through winning portion 34. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the guidance unit 52 is controlled to a guidance state based on the value of the stored general charge random number counter C4.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of modes are set as the support mode so that the support mode of the guide unit 52 is different. Specifically, in the support mode, the frequency at which the induction unit 52 is in the induction state per unit time is relative to the situation in which the firing of the game balls is continued in the same manner with respect to the game area PA. The high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are set so as to be extremely high and low.

  The high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode have the same probability (for example, 4/5 of the probability of being selected) in the induction state lottery in the induction state lottery using the common charge random number counter C4. In the low frequency support mode, the number of times the induction unit 52 is in the induction state when the induction state is won is set more frequently, and the induction unit 52 is maintained in the induction state in one execution of the induction control. The upper induction period is set to be long. In this case, when the induction state is won in the high frequency support mode and the induction state of the induction unit 52 occurs a plurality of times, the closing period from the end of one induction state to the start of the next induction state is , Is set shorter than one upper induction period. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the securement time that is minimally secured when the next induction state lottery is performed after one induction state lottery is performed rather than the low-frequency support mode One display continuation time in 43a is set short.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the second operating unit 33 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the first operating portion 32 is higher than in the second operating portion 33, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operating than the first operating portion 32 The probability of winning a prize in the section 33 is high. And, when the winning to the second operation part 33 occurs, because the payout of the predetermined number of game balls is executed, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the balls much It can be carried out.

  The configuration for increasing the frequency of the high frequency support mode to the induction state per unit time rather than the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above, and for example, the induction state winning in the induction state lottery It is good also as composition which makes high the probability of becoming. In addition, a securement time (for example, based on a prize for the special drawing through winning portion 34) is secured in the securing time to be secured when the next induced state lottery is performed after one guided state lottery is performed. In the configuration in which multiple types of variable display to be executed are prepared, in the high frequency support mode, it is set so that a short securing time is easier to be selected or the average securing time is shorter than the low frequency support mode. It may be Furthermore, the number of times of execution of the guidance state is increased, the upper limit induction period is extended, and the securing time secured upon the next guidance state lottery after the one guidance state lottery is performed is shortened. The advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be enhanced by applying any one condition or any combination of conditions among the shortening of the average securing time and the increase of the winning probability. .

  Next, the per-random number counter C1 will be described. The per random number counter C1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by "1" within the range of "0 to 399" and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the per-random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the random-number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the per-random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the per random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 399). The per random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the value of the per random number counter C1 at that time is stored in the special figure reservation area 122 at the timing when the gaming ball wins the first operating unit 32 or the second operating unit 33. Then, the determination of success or failure is performed using the value of the stored random number counter C1.

  The value of the random number to be won in the determination of the success or failure is stored in the main ROM 93 as a success or failure table. As the pass / fail table, a pass / fail table for the low probability mode and a pass / fail table for the high probability mode are set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the low probability mode and the high probability mode are set as the success or failure lottery mode in the success or failure lottery means.

  Under gaming conditions where the low probability mode hit / fail table is referred to in the above lottery, the number of hit random numbers is ten. On the other hand, under the gaming state where the high probability mode pass / fail table is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of hit random numbers is 20. If the probability of winning in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number of random numbers to be won is arbitrary. In the case of a hit result, a distribution effective period occurs in which the winning of the distribution through winning portion 35 is effective, and the distribution execution is triggered by the generation of the winning of the distribution through winning portion 35. It will shift to the mode.

  The type counter C2 is configured such that “1” is sequentially added within the range of “0 to 29”, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The type counter C 2 is periodically updated, and the value of the type counter C 2 at that time is stored in the special view holding area 122 at the timing when the gaming ball wins the first operating unit 32 or the second operating unit 33.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of hit results are set. The result of the plurality of hits is (1) not following the transition to the open / close execution mode, or (2) the transition to the open / close execution mode. It is set by providing a difference in the two conditions of the support mode in the induction unit 52 of the second operation unit 33 after the end of the branch execution mode or the end of the open / close execution mode.

  The distribution destination of the hit result for the type counter C2 is stored in the main ROM 93 as a type table. Then, as the distribution destination, a low probability jackpot result and a high probability jackpot result are set. Specifically, in the type table, among the values of the type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 15" correspond to the low probability hit result, and "16 to 29" is the high probability hit result. It corresponds.

  The low probability hit result is that after the branch execution mode without transition to the open / close execution mode or after the open / close execution mode ends, the pass / fail lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. It is a result. However, in the high-frequency support mode, the transition to the low-frequency support mode is made when the number of games has reached the end reference frequency (specifically, 100 times) after the transition.

  The high probability hit result is that the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the branch execution mode without transition to the open / close execution mode or after the open / close execution mode ends. It is a result. The high probability mode and the high frequency support mode continue until the winning result of the winning lottery results in a winning result and transition to the winning prize effective period of the distribution through winning portion 35 accordingly.

  It should be noted that the normal gaming state is not the winning period of the distribution through winning portion 35, the sorting execution mode and the opening / closing execution mode, but the normal lottery state is the low probability mode, in relation to the above gaming states. It refers to the state where the support mode is the low frequency support mode.

  The distribution counter C3 is configured such that “1” is sequentially added within the range of “0 to 29”, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The distribution counter C3 is regularly updated, and the value of the distribution counter C3 at that time is the timing when the distribution through winning portion 35 has a winning in the winning period of the distribution through winning portion 35. It is stored in the execution area 125 for distribution. Then, the distribution execution mode is executed in an execution mode corresponding to the numerical value information stored in the distribution execution area 125.

  Here, the distribution execution mode is performed a predetermined number of times where the distribution inlet 61 is opened with the predetermined distribution open period as the upper limit, and a predetermined upper limit on the distribution side The process continues until one of the conditions for the number of gaming balls to win the distribution winning device 36 is satisfied. In addition, a plurality of types of opening modes of the distribution winning device 36 are set by changing the distribution opening period from the opening of the distribution inlet 61 to the closing thereof. In detail, the distribution side long-term mode in which the distribution open period is set to 29 sec which is a long time, and the distribution side in which the distribution open period is set to 15 sec which is a medium time shorter than the above long time A period mode and a short-term mode in which the distribution release period is set to 0.5 sec, which is a short time shorter than the above-described medium time, are set. In the pachinko machine 10, in a situation where the launch operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 27 is controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the game area PA in 0.6 sec. Be done. In addition, the upper limit number on the distribution side in the distribution execution mode is set to ten. Then, in the distribution side long-term mode and the distribution side middle period mode among the opening modes, the distribution open period having a time longer than the product of the game ball firing cycle and the distribution side upper limit number is set. It will be. On the other hand, in the distribution side short-term mode, the distribution open period is set to a time shorter than the product of the game ball firing cycle and the distribution side upper limit number, more specifically, a time shorter than the game ball firing cycle. It is done. Therefore, when the distribution winning device 36 is opened once in the distribution-side long-term mode or the distribution-side middle-period mode, winnings for the distribution-side upper limit number occur at the distribution inlet 61 It is expected that when the distribution winning device 36 is opened once in the distribution side short-term mode, it is expected that no winning on the distribution inlet 61 will occur.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of execution modes of the distribution execution mode are set. Specifically, the first distribution execution mode in which the distribution inlet 61 is opened only once in the distribution-side long-term mode, and the distribution inlet 61 is opened in the distribution-side short-term mode once. There is a second distribution execution mode in which opening of the distribution inlet 61 is performed once in the distribution side middle period mode after that.

  The operation mode of the distribution winning device 36 in each of the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 8 (a1) and 8 (a2) show the execution period of the distribution execution mode, and FIGS. 8 (b1) and 8 (b2) show the distribution open period of the distribution winning device 36, and FIG. c1) and FIG. 8 (c2) show the period when the switching piece 66 of the distribution winning device 36 is disposed at the V-lead position.

  First, the first distribution execution mode will be described with reference to FIG. 8 (A). At the timing of t1, the first distribution execution mode is started as shown in FIG. 8 (a1), and the opening of the distribution inlet 61 is started as shown in FIG. 8 (b1). In this case, in the first distribution execution mode, release according to the distribution-side long-term mode is performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t2, when the predetermined period (for example, 3 sec) elapses after the opening of the distribution inlet 61 is first started, as shown in FIG. 8 (c1), the switching piece 66 is V-guided from the retracted position. Switch to position. Thereafter, when the V-lead continuation period (for example, 3 sec) elapses from the timing of t2 at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 8 (c1), the switching piece 66 is switched from the V-lead position to the retracted position.

  In this case, in the first distribution execution mode, opening of the distribution inlet 61 is executed according to the distribution side long-term mode, and the timing at which the switching piece 66 is switched to the V guidance position in relation to the firing cycle of the gaming ball is Even if the shooting operation is continued aiming at the winning of the sorting winning device 36 before the start of the first sorting execution mode, the number of winnings for the sorting winning device 36 reliably reaches the sorting upper limit number. It is not the timing. Therefore, in the first distribution execution mode, if the shooting operation is continued with the aim of winning the distribution winning device 36, one of the gaming balls that have won the distribution inlet 61 is the V winning of the distribution winning device 36. The game ball is detected by the V prize detection sensor 69 by being surely guided to the passage area 65c. Then, the game ball is detected by the V prize detection sensor 69, so that the open / close execution mode is started after the end of the first distribution execution mode.

  Thereafter, when the distribution opening period corresponding to the distribution side long-term mode elapses at the timing of t4, the distribution inlet 61 is closed as shown in FIG. 8 (b1), and shown in FIG. 8 (a1) Thus, the first distribution execution mode ends. If the number of winning prizes to the distribution winning device 36 reaches the upper limit number on the distribution side before the distribution opening period elapses, the distribution inlet 61 is closed at a timing earlier than the timing of t4, and the first The distribution execution mode ends. However, even in this case, the first distribution execution mode ends after the opportunity for the game ball to be induced is generated in the V winning aisle area 65c as described above.

  Next, the second distribution execution mode will be described with reference to FIG. 8 (B). At the timing of t11, the second distribution execution mode is started as shown in FIG. 8 (a2), and the opening of the distribution inlet 61 is started as shown in FIG. 8 (b2). In this case, in the second distribution execution mode, the opening number of the distribution inlet 61 corresponds to the distribution side short-term mode. And, the distribution opening period in the distribution side short-term mode is shorter than the period required from the start of the opening of the distribution inlet 61 to the switching of the switching piece 66 to the V-induction position. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 8 (b 2) and 8 (c 2), the distribution inlet 61 is at the timing of t 12 which is the timing before the timing of t 13 at which the switching piece 66 is switched to the V induction position. It is closed. However, even if the distribution inlet 61 is closed, the second distribution execution mode does not end and continues.

  Thereafter, at timing t13, which is a state in which the second distribution execution mode is continued and in which the closing of the distribution inlet 61 is continued, the opening of the distribution inlet 61 is first started after the opening of the distribution inlet 61 is started. When the time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, the switching piece 66 is switched from the retracted position to the V guiding position as shown in FIG. 8 (c2). Thereafter, at the timing of t14 in which the second distribution execution mode is continued and the closing of the distribution inlet 61 is continued, the V-lead continuation period (for example, 3 sec) elapses from the timing of t13. By doing this, as shown in FIG. 8 (c2), the switching piece 66 is switched from the V guiding position to the retracted position.

  In this case, since the opening mode of the distribution inlet 61 is the distribution side short-term mode in the first opening cycle in the second distribution execution mode, winning of the distribution winning device 36 does not occur in the first opening cycle. Probability is high. Further, even if a winning on the distribution winning device 36 occurs, a game ball which is properly dropped on the distributing winning device 36 and flows down at the timing when the first opening cycle ends is a branch on the distribution winning device 36 The longest period required for the passage 65 to reach the downstream side of the branch position to the V prize passage region 65c is the period from the end of the first opening cycle to the timing at which the switching piece 66 is switched to the V induction position. It is shorter than (timing of t12 to timing of t13). Therefore, even if the shooting operation is continued aiming at winning to the sorting winning device 36 in the second sorting execution mode, the game ball can be detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 of the sorting winning device 36 Sex is low. Then, since the game ball is not detected by the V prize detection sensor 69, the open / close execution mode is not started after the end of the second distribution execution mode.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (b 2), the distribution inlet 61 is opened again at timing t 15 which is a timing after timing t 14 at which the switching piece 66 is switched from the V induction position to the retracted position. . The opening number of the distribution inlet 61 corresponds to the distribution side middle period mode. Thereafter, when the distribution opening period corresponding to the distribution side middle period mode elapses at the timing of t16, the distribution inlet 61 is closed as shown in FIG. 8 (b 2), and shown in FIG. 8 (a 2) Thus, the second distribution execution mode ends. In addition, when the open mode of the distribution inlet 61 is the distribution side middle period mode, the number of winning prizes to the distribution winning device 36 reaches the distribution side upper limit number in the distribution open period according to the distribution side middle period mode. obtain. Then, if the number of winning prizes to the distribution winning device 36 reaches the upper limit number on the distribution side before the distribution opening period corresponding to the distribution side middle period mode elapses, at a timing earlier than the timing of t16. The distribution inlet 61 is closed to end the second distribution execution mode.

  As described above, in the first distribution execution mode, if the game ball aiming at winning in the distribution winning device 36 is normally fired, detection of the game ball in the V prize detection sensor 69 occurs, The open / close execution mode occurs after the end of the 1-split execution mode. On the other hand, in the second distribution execution mode, even if the game ball aiming for winning in the distribution winning device 36 is normally fired, detection of the game ball in the V prize detection sensor 69 basically occurs. There is no occurrence of the open / close execution mode after the end of the second distribution execution mode. As a result, the player is expected to generate the first distribution execution mode, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Incidentally, in the opening / closing execution mode, a round game is executed a predetermined number of times. In the round game, the opening number where the large winning opening 37a is opened is performed a predetermined number of times with the predetermined special power opening period as the upper limit, and the predetermined upper limit number of gaming balls is the large winning opening It is a game that continues until one of the conditions for winning 37a is satisfied. Specifically, the upper limit number of round games in the open / close execution mode is set to 15 times, and in each round game, the special game open period is 29 sec and the number of upper limit number is 10 and the number of open big prize ports 37a is 1 It is executed only once. In this case, as described above, in the situation where the launch operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball emission mechanism 27 is driven such that one game ball is emitted toward the game area PA in 0.6 sec. Since it is controlled, the special power release period in each round game is longer than the product of the firing cycle of the game balls and the upper limit number of one round game. Therefore, if firing of the game ball aiming for a prize to the special power winning device 37 is normally performed, the number of game balls equal to or more than the upper limit number will be won in the large winning opening 37a in each round game. Then, every time a winning to the special winning opening 37a occurs, the payout of the number of gaming balls corresponding to the special power winning device 37 is executed. Therefore, when the transition to the open / close execution mode occurs, a benefit of increasing the number of gaming balls usable by the player is provided to the player.

  In addition, regardless of which of the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode occurs, in the corresponding distribution execution mode, the winning of the game balls of the distribution side upper limit number to the distribution winning device 36 is achieved It can occur. Therefore, it is possible to make the total winning number for the distribution winning device 36 in the distribution execution mode the same or substantially the same in the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode, and in the distribution execution mode It is possible to make the total number of gaming balls to be paid out the same or substantially the same in the branch execution mode. Thereby, even in the second distribution execution mode basically not accompanied by the transition to the open / close execution mode, the increase in the number of gaming balls usable by the player is equivalent to that in the first distribution execution mode. It becomes possible to obtain a profit, and it is possible to reduce the player's sense of disadvantage for the occurrence of the second distribution execution mode.

  The selection mode of the distribution execution mode for the distribution counter C3 is stored in the main ROM 93 as a distribution table. Specifically, in the distribution table, among the values of the distribution counter C3 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 2” correspond to the first distribution execution mode, and “3 to 29” are It corresponds to the second distribution execution mode. That is, the selection probability is set lower in the first distribution execution mode than in the second distribution execution mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selection probability may be the same or substantially the same in the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode, and the second distribution execution mode is the second one. The selection probability may be set to be lower than that in the one distribution execution mode.

  Next, the variation type counter CS will be described. The fluctuation type counter CS is sequentially incremented by one within the range of "0-198", and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The fluctuation type counter CS is used when the main MPU 92 determines the fluctuation display period in the special view display unit 42 a. Specifically, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired when determining the fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation display in the special view display unit 42a.

<About the relationship between the flow of the game and the display content on the symbol display device 44>
Next, the relationship between the flow of the game in the pachinko machine 10 and the display contents in the symbol display device 44 will be described. FIG. 9 is an explanatory view for explaining the relationship between the flow of the game in the pachinko machine 10 and the display contents in the symbol display device 44. As shown in FIG.

  In the situation where neither the game execution time nor the winning combination valid period of the distribution through winning portion 35, the distribution execution mode and the opening / closing execution mode is executed, the game ball to any one of the first operation portion 32 and the second operation portion 33 When the prize is won, or when the reserve information is reserved and stored in the special view reserve area 122, the main MPU 92 executes the pass / fail judgment processing on the reserve information of the special view side as shown in FIG. 9A. Be done. In this case, the variable display of the pattern is started in the special view display unit 42a. Further, as shown in FIG. 9 (A), also in the symbol display device 44, an effect for a game is started.

  FIGS. 10 (a) and 10 (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device 44 in the winning combination period of the game times and the through winning portion for distribution 35 and the distribution execution mode. In the following description, the game period, the winning prize effective period of the distribution through winning portion 35, and the period during which the distribution execution mode is being executed are also referred to as a unit change execution period.

  As shown in FIG. 10A, in the unit variation execution period, three variation display regions 131 of the first variation display region 131, the second variation display region 132, and the third variation display region 133 are displayed on the symbol display device 44. 133133 is set. In each of the three variable display areas 131 to 133, a plurality of kinds of symbols are variably displayed. As these plural types of symbols, nine types of symbols with numbers “1” to “9” are respectively set. When variable display of symbols is performed in each of the variable display areas 131 to 133, nine types of symbols are sequentially displayed in ascending order of numbers in any of the variable display areas 131 to 133. In addition, after the symbol of "9" is displayed, display object will return to the symbol of "1". The first variation display area 131 and the second variation display area 132 are set side by side in the upper area of the display surface of the symbol display device 44, and the third variation display area 133 in the display surface of the symbol display device 44 is a first variation In the area below the display area 131 and the second variable display area 132, the horizontal center position is set to be included.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, when the main MPU 92 executes a pass / fail judgment process on the holding information on the special view side and the effect of the game circulation is started, that is, when the unit change execution period is started. As described above, in all of the first variation display area 131, the second variation display area 132, and the third variation display area 133 in the symbol display device 44, the variation display of the symbol is started. Thereafter, the fluctuation display of symbols is sequentially stopped in the order of the first fluctuation display area 131 → the second fluctuation display area 132 → the third fluctuation display area 133. In this case, when the winning prize effective period of the through winning portion for distribution 35 does not occur, the reach variation display does not occur in the symbol display device 44 as shown in FIG. 9B, and FIG. As shown in, the variation display of the symbols in each of the variable display areas 131 to 133 is ended without the combination of reach symbols and the combination of the hit symbols being stopped and displayed.

  On the other hand, when the winning period of the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs, that is, when the result of the pass / fail judgment processing on the special drawing side hold information is the winning result, the timing of c) and as shown in FIG. 9C, the combination of reach symbols is displayed by the stop symbols in the first variation display area 131 and the second variation display area 132 being the same symbol, and the third variation in that situation In the display area 133, reach variation display in which symbol variation display is performed is performed. That is, in the first change display area 131 and the second change display area 132, the stop result after the change display of the symbol corresponds to the result of the success / failure determination process for the suspension information on the special view side, and the result of the success / failure determination process is successful If it is not a result, the same symbol is not stopped and displayed in the first change display area 131 and the second change display area 132, and if the result of the judgment processing is a hit result, the first change display area The same symbol is stopped and displayed in the 131 and the second variation display area 132.

  The timing at which the reach variation display is started in the symbol display device 44 corresponds to the end timing of the effect for the game cycle, and the winning prize effective period of the distribution through winning portion 35 is started at this timing. When the winning effective period of the distribution through winning portion 35 is started, as shown in FIG. 10 (b), the symbol display device 44 performs reach variation display, and further, the winning of the distribution through winning portion 35 A winning aim notification image 134 is displayed to notify that the target should be aimed. In the winning aim notification image 134, the special drawing through winning portion 34, the distribution through winning portion 35, the second operating portion 33, the special power winning device 37, and the like are arranged in parallel in the vertical direction in the right area PA3 of the gaming area PA. The images corresponding to the distribution winning device 36 on a one-to-one basis are the actual installation of the special drawing through winning portion 34, the distribution through winning portion 35, the second operating portion 33, the special power winning device 37 and the distribution winning device 36 An image is displayed which is displayed in a mode corresponding to the mode, and further indicates that the player should aim for winning in the distribution through winning portion 35 among them. As a result, the player can easily recognize that it is a winning effective period of the distribution through winning portion 35. Therefore, it becomes easy to perform the shooting operation aiming at the winning of the distribution through winning portion 35.

  A launch operation aiming at winning in the distribution through winning portion 35 is performed, and a winning in the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs as shown in FIG. A determination process is performed. When the target selected in the distribution determination process is the first distribution execution mode, the first distribution execution mode is started in the distribution winning device 36 as shown in FIG. 9 (e). Even in this case, the reach variation display on the symbol display device 44 is continued. Further, even when the first distribution execution mode is started, the display of the winning aim notification image 134 is continued along with the reach change display. In the winning aim notification image 134, the special drawing through winning portion 34, the distribution through winning portion 35, the second operating portion 33, the special power winning device 37, and the special drawing through winning portion 34 vertically arranged in the right area PA3 of the gaming area PA. The images corresponding to the distribution winning device 36 on a one-to-one basis are the actual installation of the special drawing through winning portion 34, the distribution through winning portion 35, the second operating portion 33, the special power winning device 37 and the distribution winning device 36 The display content displayed in the mode corresponding to the mode is maintained. However, the content of the winning aim notification image 134 is changed from an image showing that aiming for winning in the distribution through winning portion 35 is to be an image showing that aiming for winning in the distribution winning device 36. The contents of the winning aim notification image 134 are the same as in the case where the second distribution execution mode is started.

  As described above, the game ball is basically detected by the V prize detection sensor 69 in the first distribution execution mode. As shown in FIG. 9 (f), when the game ball is detected by the V prize detection sensor 69, the fluctuation display of the pattern in the third fluctuation display area 133 is ended even if it is in the middle of the first distribution execution mode. Do. In this case, as shown in FIG. 9 (D), the stop symbol of the third variation display area 133 is a symbol forming a combination of reach symbols in the first variation display area 131 and the second variation display area 132. is there. That is, when the detection of the game ball in the V prize detection sensor 69 occurs, the reach variation display in the symbol display device 44 is ended in a state where the combination of symbols is stopped and displayed even if it is in the middle of the distribution execution mode It will be. This makes it possible to clearly indicate to the player that the transition to the open / close execution mode will occur.

  Thereafter, when the first distribution execution mode ends, an open / close execution mode is generated as shown in FIG. 9 (g). When the open / close execution mode is generated, in the symbol display device 44, the display effect corresponding to the start of the open / close execution mode is started in the state where the winning aim notification image 134 is displayed. In the winning aim notification image 134, the special drawing through winning portion 34, the distribution through winning portion 35, the second operating portion 33, the special power winning device 37, and the special drawing through winning portion 34 vertically arranged in the right area PA3 of the gaming area PA. The images corresponding to the distribution winning device 36 on a one-to-one basis are the actual installation of the special drawing through winning portion 34, the distribution through winning portion 35, the second operating portion 33, the special power winning device 37 and the distribution winning device 36 The display content displayed in the mode corresponding to the mode is maintained. However, the content of the winning aim notification image 134 is changed from an image showing that the distribution winning device 36 should aim for winning to an image showing that the special power winning device 37 should aim for winning. The contents of the winning aim notification image 134 are the same as in the case where the detection of the gaming ball in the V winning detection sensor 69 occurs in the second distribution execution mode and the open / close execution mode is generated.

  On the other hand, when the target selected in the distribution determination process of the main MPU 92 is the second distribution execution mode, the second distribution execution mode is started in the distribution winning device 36 as shown in FIG. Be done. Even in this case, the reach variation display on the symbol display device 44 is continued. As described above, in the second distribution execution mode, basically no game balls are detected by the V prize detection sensor 69, so the open / close execution mode does not basically occur after the end of the second distribution execution mode. In addition, the variation display of the pattern in the third variation display area 133 ends at the timing when the second distribution execution mode ends. In this case, as shown in FIG. 9 (E), the stop symbol of the third variation display area 133 is a symbol forming a combination of reach symbols in the first variation display area 131 and the second variation display area 132 Are different designs. That is, when the sorting execution mode ends without detection of the gaming ball in the V prize detection sensor 69, the reach fluctuation display on the symbol display device 44 ends without the stop symbol combination being displayed. Become. This makes it possible to clearly indicate to the player that the transition to the open / close execution mode does not occur. In addition, even if the first distribution execution mode is generated, when the detection of the game ball in the V prize detection sensor 69 does not occur, the open / close execution mode is not generated, so the combination of winning symbols is displayed as a stop. The reach change display on the symbol display device 44 ends without being done.

  Here, even if the second distribution execution mode is executed in the distribution winning device 36 as shown in FIG. 9 (i), the game ball is detected by the V prize detection sensor 69 as shown in FIG. 9 (j). It can happen that it is detected. For example, in the second distribution execution mode, opening of the distribution winning device 36 in the short-time distribution mode first occurs once, but in the distribution open period in the short-time distribution mode A winning on the minute winning device 36 occurs, and the winning gaming ball stays on the upstream side of the branch position to the V winning passage area 65c in the discharge passage area 65b for some reason, and the switching piece 66 is at the V guiding position It is conceivable that the vehicle is led to the V winning passage area 65c by reaching its branch position after being arranged. Such an event may occur due to a ball jam or the like even when playing a game regularly, and may also be caused by a fraud.

  As shown in FIG. 9 (j), when the game ball is detected by the V prize detection sensor 69, the symbol in the third variation display area 133 of the symbol display device 44 even if it is in the middle of the second distribution execution mode The variable display of is finished. In this case, as shown in FIG. 9 (F), the stop symbol of the third variation display area 133 is a symbol forming a combination of reach symbols in the first variation display area 131 and the second variation display area 132 Are different designs. That is, when the detection of the gaming ball in the V prize detection sensor 69 occurs in the second distribution execution mode, the symbol display device 44 hits and the combination of symbols is not stopped and displayed. Furthermore, the stop symbol of the third variation display area 133 is a symbol not included in the symbol to be displayed when the variation display of the symbol is performed in the third variation display area 133, specifically, It is a symbol of "E". This symbol is a symbol which is displayed in a stopped state only when the detection of the gaming ball in the V prize detection sensor 69 occurs in the second distribution execution mode. As a result, it is possible to clearly notify the player or the administrator of the game hall that the detection of the game ball in the V prize detection sensor 69 has occurred despite the second distribution execution mode.

  Thereafter, when the second distribution execution mode ends, an open / close execution mode is generated as shown in FIG. 9 (k). In the opening / closing execution mode, although the prize aiming notification image 134 corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode as described above is displayed on the symbol display device 44, the display effect corresponding to the start of the opening / closing execution mode is started The display mode of the stop symbol shown in FIG. 9 (E) is maintained. As a result, it is possible to clearly notify that the open / close execution mode generated from the second branch execution mode is in progress even during the execution of the open / close execution mode. The execution mode of the open / close execution mode generated from the second distribution execution mode is different from the execution mode of the open / close execution mode generated from the first distribution execution mode.

  Hereinafter, the execution mode of the opening / closing execution mode generated from the first distribution execution mode and the execution mode of the opening / closing execution mode generated from the second distribution execution mode will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 11A shows the execution mode of the open / close execution mode generated from the first distribution execution mode, and FIG. 11B shows the execution mode of the open / close execution mode generated from the second distribution execution mode. Further, FIG. 11A shows a period during which the open / close execution mode is being executed, and FIG. 11 (A) and 11 (B) show the case where the winning of the upper limit number of special power winning devices 37 does not occur in each round game.

  First, the execution mode of the open / close execution mode generated from the first distribution execution mode will be described with reference to FIG.

  The mode is switched to the open / close execution mode at time t1, and opening of the special power winning device 37 in the first round game is started at time t2, which is the timing when the special battery opening period T1 has elapsed. Further, the special power winning device 37 is closed at the timing of t3 at which the special power release period T2 has elapsed. Thereafter, the release of the special power winning device 37 in the second round game is started at the timing of t4, which is the timing when the first special electric power closing period T3 (specifically, 2 seconds) has elapsed. Then, at timing t5 to timing t10, the closing of the special power prize device 37 accompanying the elapse of the special power open period T2 and the opening of the special power prize device 37 accompanying the elapse of the first special power closing period T3 are repeated.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t11, which is the timing when the special power release period T2 in the last round game has elapsed, the special power prize device 37 is closed and the effect for ending is started. Then, at the timing of t12, which is the timing when the ending period T4 has elapsed, the current opening / closing execution mode ends.

  Next, the execution mode of the open / close execution mode generated from the second distribution execution mode will be described with reference to FIG. 11 (B).

  At the timing of t21, it shifts to the opening / closing execution mode, and at the timing of t22, which is the timing when the opening period for special powers T1 same as the situation triggered by the first distribution execution mode, the special power winning device 37 of the first round game Opening is started. Further, the special power winning device 37 is closed at timing t23, which is the timing when the same special power release period T2 as the situation that triggered the first distribution execution mode has elapsed.

  Thereafter, opening of the special charge winning device 37 in the second round game is started at the timing of t24, which is the timing when the second special charge closing period T5 (specifically, 60 seconds) longer than the first special power closing period T3 has elapsed. . Then, at the timing of t25 to t30, the closing of the special power prize device 37 accompanying the elapse of the special power open period T2 and the opening of the special power prize device 37 accompanying the elapse of the second special electric power closing period T5 are repeated.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t31 which is the timing when the special power release period T2 in the last round game has elapsed, the special power prize device 37 is closed and the effect for ending is started. Then, at the timing of t32, which is the timing at which the same ending period T4 as that in the first distribution execution mode has elapsed, the present opening / closing execution mode ends.

  As described above, in the open / close execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode, the electric power closing period between the rounds takes a longer time than the open / close execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode. Then, in the open / close execution mode generated in response to the second distribution execution mode, notification of that is performed by the pachinko machine 10 itself, that is, by the symbol display device 44, the display light emitting unit 73 and the speaker unit 74. This makes it possible to make the manager of the game hall recognize the fact during the opening / closing execution mode, and to provide the manager with a sufficient time to cope with it. Furthermore, when the open / close execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode occurs due to the fraudulent act, it is possible to reduce the digestibility of the open / close execution mode, and the unit time due to the fraudulent action It is possible to reduce the amount of benefit gained per hit.

  Further, the period during closing of the special power winning device 37 in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode is longer than the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode. Since the period during closing is constant without depending on the situation where the game ball is being fired, etc., the period during such closing is extended to open / close based on the second distribution execution mode It is possible to reliably increase the length of the execution mode.

  In addition, only the ending period is extended and the open / close execution mode is not extended, but the special power closing period before the last round game is extended for a long time in open / close execution mode Is being promoted. Thereby, when the occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode is caused by the fraudulent action, the fraudulent action is dealt with at a stage before the payout of the game ball in the opening / closing execution mode is completed. It is possible to

  Further, the upper limit number and the special power release period of each round game are the same in the open / close execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode and the open / close execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode. Thus, the open / close execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode is generated when the open / close execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode is generated as a result of the game being played regularly rather than an illegal action. It is possible to make payout of the game ball equivalent to

<Various processing executed by main MPU 92>
Next, various processes executed by the main MPU 92 to advance a game will be described. The processes of the main MPU 92 are roughly classified into a main process activated upon power-on and a timer interrupt process activated periodically (in a cycle of 4 msec in the present embodiment).

<Main processing>
First, the main processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the main processing, first, power on wait processing is executed (step S101). In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits until 1 sec elapses after the main process is started, without progressing to the next process. Thereafter, access to the main RAM 94 is permitted (step S102), and the internal function register of the main MPU 92 is set (step S103).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase button provided on the power / fire control unit 88 is manually operated (step S104), and it is determined whether or not the power failure flag of the main RAM 94 is set to "1". (Step S105). Also, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed (step S106), and it is determined whether the checksum matches the checksum stored at power-off, that is, the validity of the stored data ( Step S107).

  In the case of the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of power on, such as at the start of operation of the game hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase button. Therefore, if the RAM erase button is pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. In addition, when the occurrence information of the power-off is not set, or when the abnormality of the data stored and held is confirmed by the checksum, the process similarly shifts to the process of step S108. In step S108, the main RAM 94 is cleared as initialization of the main RAM 94. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S109.

  On the other hand, when the RAM erase button is not pressed, the process in step S108 is not performed on the condition that the power failure flag is set to “1” and the checksum is normal. Go to In step S109, power on setting processing is performed. In the power on setting process, a predetermined area of the main RAM 94 such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value. Also, a payout initialization command indicating that the initialization of the RAM of the payout control device 87 should be performed is transmitted to the payout control device 87.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining process of step S110 to step S113. That is, although the main MPU 92 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, a remaining time is generated between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. Although this remaining time fluctuates in accordance with the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, the remaining process of step S110 to step S113 is repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining process of the step S110 to the step S113 is a non-periodic process which is executed irregularly.

  In the remaining process, in order to inhibit the generation of the timer interrupt process, the interrupt disable is set (step S110). Further, the random number initial value updating process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed (step S111), and the variation counter updating process for updating the variation type counter CS is executed (step S112). In these update processes, the present numerical value information is read out from the corresponding counter of the main side RAM 94, and a process of adding one to the read out numerical value information is executed, and then a process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0". Thereafter, interrupt permission setting is performed to switch from the state in which the generation of the timer interrupt processing is prohibited to the state in which the generation is permitted (step S113). If the process of step S113 is performed, it will return to step S110 and will repeat the process of step S110-step S113.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly activated in a cycle of 4 msec.

  First, a power failure information storage process is executed (step S201). In the power failure information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of the power interruption is received from the power interruption monitoring board 95, and when the occurrence of the power interruption is specified, the process upon power failure is executed.

  Thereafter, a lottery random number updating process is executed (step S202). In the random number updating process for drawing, the update of the per-random number counter C1, the type counter C2, the distribution counter C3 and the general electric random number counter C4 is executed. Specifically, after the current numerical information is sequentially read out from the per-random number counter C1, the type counter C2, the distribution counter C3 and the general-purpose random number counter C4, and the process of adding one each of the read numerical information is executed. Execute processing to overwrite the counter of reading source. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0".

  Thereafter, the random number initial value updating process is performed as in step S111 (step S203), and the variation counter updating process is performed as in step S112 (step S204). Thereafter, the game stop determination process is executed (step S205). In the game stop determination process, it is monitored whether or not the progress of the game is to be stopped, and if the progress of the game is to be stopped, the execution of the process for advancing the game is stopped. Thereafter, on condition that the progress of the game is not stopped (step S206: NO), the processing after step S207 is executed.

  In step S207, port output processing is performed. In the port output process, when setting of output information is performed in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for performing an output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 37 c, 56, 63, 67 is executed. For example, when the information to switch the distribution inlet 61 of the distribution winning device 36 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the drive portion 63 for the distribution inlet should be started to switch to the closed state. When the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped. In addition, when the information to switch the switching piece 66 of the distribution winning device 36 to the V lead position is set, the output of the drive signal to the switching drive unit 67 is started, and the information to be switched to the retraction position is set. If it is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped. Also, when the information to switch the special winning opening 37a of the special electric power winning device 37 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the drive portion 37c for special electric power is started, and the information to be switched to the closed state is set. If it is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped. Further, when the information to switch the induction unit 52 of the second operation unit 33 to the induction state is set, the output of the drive signal to the guide drive unit 56 is started, and the information to be switched to the non-induction state is set. If it does, the output of the drive signal to the guide drive unit 56 is stopped.

  Thereafter, the reading process is executed (step S208). In the reading process, reading of signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal is executed, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

  Thereafter, the winning detection process is executed (step S209). In the winning detection process, the signals received from the various winning detection sensors 32a to 69 are read, and the general winning portion 31, the first operating portion 32, the second operating portion 33, the special drawing through winning portion 34, the distribution A process of specifying the presence or absence of a winning on the through winning portion 35, the distribution winning device 36, and the special power winning device 37 is executed.

  Thereafter, a timer update process is performed to collectively update numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 94 (step S210). In this case, the timer counter is stored in which the stored numerical information is subtracted and updated, but both the update of the subtraction type timer counter and the update of the addition type timer counter are collectively performed. It is good also as composition.

  Thereafter, the fraud detection process is executed to monitor whether or not a predetermined event set as a fraud monitoring target has occurred (step S211). In the fraud detection process, the occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and by confirming that a predetermined event has occurred, the setting for stopping the game is performed in step S205 in the next timer interrupt process, An affirmative determination is made in step S206.

  Thereafter, launch control processing for performing launch control of the game balls is executed (step S212). In the situation where the firing operation is continued to the firing control device 28, as described above, one gaming ball is fired every 0.6 seconds so as to have a predetermined firing cycle.

  Thereafter, as input state monitoring processing, on the basis of the information read in the reading processing of step S208, disconnection confirmation of each winning detection sensor 33a-59b and opening confirmation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are performed (step S213).

  After that, the special figure special power control process for performing the execution control of the game time in the special figure display section 42a, the display control of the distribution display section 42c, the execution control of the distribution execution mode and the execution control of the opening / closing execution mode ( Step S214). In addition, a determination as to whether or not the induction unit 52 of the second operation unit 33 is to be brought into the induction state, and a general-purpose diagram for switching the induction unit 52 between the induction state and the non-induction state. The power control process is executed (step S215). If the support mode is the low frequency support mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode, it corresponds to the low frequency support mode, if it is not in the winning prize effective period of the distribution through winning portion 35, the distribution execution mode and the opening / closing execution mode The display control of the common view display unit 43a and the drive control of the guidance unit 52 are performed according to the contents, and if the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the display control and guidance of the common view display unit 43a are according to the contents corresponding to the high frequency support mode. The drive control of the unit 52 is performed. Further, in the common drawing common control control process, if the winning combination valid period of the distribution through winning portion 35 is any of the distribution execution mode and the opening / closing execution mode, the support mode of the guidance unit 52 is frequently supported until just before that. Set Support Mode to Infrequent Support Mode, regardless of whether it is set to Mode. Thereby, the guiding unit 52 prevents the flow of gaming balls directed to the distribution winning device 36 in the distribution execution mode or the flow of gaming balls directed to the special electric winning device 37 in the opening / closing execution mode from being obstructed by the guidance unit 52. It becomes possible.

  Thereafter, based on the processing result of the immediately preceding step S214 to step S215, setting of output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the special information side holding information in the special view holding display unit 42b, and The output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number on the common drawing suspension display unit 43b is set (step S216). Also, based on the processing result of the immediately preceding step S214 to step S215, setting of output information for updating the display content of the special view display unit 42a, and output information for updating the display content of the distribution display unit 42c. The setting and output information for updating the display contents of the common view display unit 43a are set (step S216).

  Thereafter, the contents of the command and signal received from the payout control device 87 are confirmed, and a payout state reception process for performing a process corresponding to the confirmation result is executed (step S217). Further, a payout output process for setting a winning ball command as an output target is executed (step S218). Also, an external information setting process for controlling the start and end of output of an external signal according to the processing result of various processes executed in the timer interrupt process this time is executed (step S219).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S206, or after the processing in steps S207 to S219 is performed, the present timer interrupt processing ends.

<Special figure special power control process>
Next, the special figure special power control process executed in step S214 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the special figure special power control process, when winning is generated in the first operation unit 32 or the second operation unit 33, a process for acquiring the suspension information on the special view side is executed, and the suspension on the special view side is performed. When the information is stored, a decision on the hold information is made, and a process for producing effects for the game is executed with the decision on the trigger. In addition, if the result of the success or failure judgment is a hit result, after the effect for the game circulation is executed, the winning through effective period of the through winning portion for distribution 35 is generated, and the through through portion for distribution 35 during the effective period for winning. When a prize winning occurs, a process of shifting to the distribution execution mode is executed. Then, when the game ball is detected by the V prize detection sensor 69 in the distribution execution mode, processing is executed to shift to the open / close execution mode after the distribution execution mode ends.

  Specifically, in the special figure special power control process, an acquisition process of holding information on the special figure side is executed (step S301). In the acquisition processing of the suspension information on the special view side, to the first operation unit 32 or the second operation unit 33 in a situation where the number of the suspension information on the special view side stored in the special view storage area 122 is less than the upper limit storage number. When the special prize is generated, the value of the per random number counter C1 and the value of the type counter C2 are used as the special drawing side retention information, and the special figure side in the first area 123a to the fourth area 123d of the first special Among the areas in which the hold information is not stored, the information is stored in the area on the earlier side of the order of digestion. Also, when the special drawing side holding information is acquired, the data for causing the display contents of the special view holding display unit 42b to be updated in accordance with the increase in the number of the special drawing side holding information this time. Make settings. When the special drawing side hold information is acquired, the hold increase command is transmitted to the sound side MPU 103. Thereby, the image for informing the number of pending storages of the pending information on the special view side in the symbol display device 44 is updated corresponding to the new acquisition of the pending information on the special view side.

  Thereafter, the special drawing special electric power address table stored in the main ROM 93 is read out (step S302). The start address of the program for executing the process corresponding to the numerical information of the special figure special charge counter is set in the special figure special electricity address table. The special view special charge counter is a counter for specifying the processing content to be executed in the special view special charge control process by the main MPU 92.

  In the special figure special power control process, a process for controlling the effect for the game circulation, a process for controlling the winning effective period of the distribution through winning portion 35, and a process for controlling the distribution execution mode And processing for controlling the open / close execution mode. In this case, as the processing for controlling the effects for the game use, in order to advance the special effects variation start process (step S305), which is a process for starting the effects for the game use, and the effects for the game use. A special figure variation process (step S306) which is a process of and a special figure determination process (step S307) which is a process for ending an effect for game circulation are set. Further, as a process for controlling the winning effective period of the distribution through winning portion 35, a distribution standby process (step S308) is set. Also, as processing for controlling the distribution execution mode, processing for starting distribution (step S309), which is processing for controlling the opening of the distribution execution mode, and controlling the period after the opening of the distribution execution mode A distribution process (step S310), which is a process for performing the process, is set. Also, as a process for controlling the open / close execution mode, a special power start process (step S311) which is a process for controlling the opening of the open / close execution mode and a process for controlling the open state of the special electric winning device 37 The special electric power open process (step S312) and the special electric power close process (step S313) for controlling the closed state of the special electric prize device 37, and the ending of the open / close execution mode and the end of the open / close execution mode A special power termination process (step S314), which is a process for controlling the transition of the game state, is set.

  The special view special charge counter can take values of "0" to "9", and each value of "0" to "9" corresponds to the start address SA0 to SA9 of each process (steps S305 to S314). ing. Specifically, when the value of the special figure special power counter is "0", the special figure variation start process (step S305) is to be executed, and when the value of the special figure special charge counter is "1", When the process during figure fluctuation (step S306) is to be executed, and the value of the special figure special power counter is "2", the process during special figure determination (step S307) is to be executed, and the value of the special figure special power counter is " If it is 3 ", the distribution standby process (step S308) is to be executed, and if the value of the special figure special power counter is" 4, "the distribution start process (step S309) is to be executed. The distribution process (step S310) is to be executed when the value of the special figure special power counter is "5", and the special power start process (step S311) when the value of the special figure special power counter is "6" Is the target of execution, The special electric power release processing (step S312) is executed when the figure special electric power counter value is "7", and the special electric power closed processing (step S313) when the special electric special charge counter value is "8". Is the execution target, and the special power termination process (step S314) is the execution target when the value of the special drawing special power counter is "9".

  In the special view special power control process, after reading the special view special power address table (step S302), the start address corresponding to the information of the special view special charge counter is obtained from the special view special power address table (step S303) The process jumps to the process indicated by the start address (step S304). Hereinafter, the special figure fluctuation start process (step S305), the special figure fluctuation process (step S306), the special figure determination process (step S307), the distribution standby process (step S308), the distribution start process (step S309) The distribution process (step S310), the electric power start process (step S311), the electric power open process (step S312), the electric power close process (step S313) and the electric power end process (step S314) will be individually described.

<Special chart change start process>
First, the special figure change start process of step S305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the special figure fluctuation start process, the data setting process is executed (step S402) on condition that the number of the reserved information on the special figure side is one or more (step S401: YES). In the data setting process, the data stored in the first area 123a of the special map reservation area 122 is moved to the special drawing execution area 124. Thereafter, processing is performed to shift data stored in the storage area of the special map reservation area 122. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 123a to 123d to the lower area side, and clears the data of the first area 123a, and the second area 123b → The data in each area is shifted in such a manner as the first area 123a, the third area 123c, the second area 123b, the fourth area 123d, and the third area 123c. Further, in the data setting process, data setting is performed so that the display contents of the special view reserve display unit 42b are updated in accordance with the decrease in the number of pieces of reserve information on the special view side this time. Further, in the data setting process, the hold decrease command is transmitted to the sound side MPU 103. Thereby, the image for informing the number of pending storages of the pending information on the special view side in the symbol display device 44 is updated in correspondence with the decrease in the pending information on the special view side.

  After the data setting process is performed, a success / failure determination process is performed (step S403). In the success or failure determination process, if the success or failure lottery mode is the low probability mode, the success or failure table for the low probability mode is read from the main ROM 93, and if the success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, the success or failure table for the high probability mode is the main ROM 93 Read from After reading the success or failure table, the information for judging whether to pass or not, that is, the numerical information acquired from the random number counter C1 is read out from the hold information stored in the execution area 124 for special drawing, and the read numerical information It is determined whether or not it matches any of the numerical information set as the hit result in.

  If the result of the pass / fail judgment processing is a hit result (step S404: YES), the type judgment processing is executed (step S405). In the type determination process, the type table is read from the main ROM 93, the information for type determination, that is, the numerical information acquired from the type counter C2 is read from the hold information stored in the special drawing execution area 124, and the read numerical value It is determined which of the low probability winning result and the high probability hitting result set in the type table corresponds to the information.

  After the type determination process is executed, “1” is set to the flag of the main RAM 94 corresponding to the type of hit result identified in the type determination process (step S406). Specifically, the low probability flag is set to “1” when corresponding to the low probability hit result, and “1” is set to the high probability flag when corresponding to the high probability hit result. . In the following description, the process of determining whether or not various types of hits are performed is performed by determining whether the corresponding flag of the main RAM 94 is set to “1”. In the state where "1" is set in step S406, the game state transition process is executed when the distribution execution mode without transition to the open / close execution mode ends or when the open / close execution mode ends. It is cleared to "0" when

  After the flag setting process for the hit result is executed, the stop result setting process for the hit result is executed (step S407). Specifically, the information on the stop mode of the symbol to be finally displayed on the special view display unit 42a in the current game run is specified from the stop result table for the hit result stored in advance in the main ROM 93, The specified information is stored in the main RAM 94. In the stop result table for this hit result, the types of stop modes of the symbols stopped and displayed on the special view display unit 42a are set to be different for each type of the hit result, and in step S407, the process proceeds to step S405. The main RAM 94 stores information on the stop mode of the pattern according to the type of hit result identified. In addition, the stop mode of the pattern may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with each hit result, and the stop modes of a plurality of types of patterns may be set for at least a part of the hit results. Although the method of selecting a stop result for a hit result in which stop modes of a plurality of types of patterns are set is optional, for example, the stop result may be selected according to the value of the type counter C2.

  If the result of the propriety determination processing is not a hit result (step S404: NO), stop result setting processing for outliers is executed (step S408). Specifically, the information of the aspect of the pattern to be finally displayed on the special view display unit 42a in the current game run is specified from the stop result table for the out result stored in advance in the main ROM 93, and The identified information is stored in the main RAM 94. The information of the pattern aspect selected in this case is different from the information of the pattern aspect selected in the case of the hit result.

  After one of the stop result setting processes is executed, a process of specifying a fluctuation display period is executed (step S409). In the specific process of the fluctuation display period, a process for specifying the fluctuation display period of the game number is executed. Specifically, first, a table for a variable display period corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination process and the type determination process is read out from the main ROM 93 while supporting the support mode in the current game run. These variable display time tables are set such that a longer variable display period is more likely to be selected when the result of the pass / fail judgment processing is a hit result than when it is an outlier result, and the result of the type judgment processing is high A longer variable display period is easier to be selected than in the case of the low probability hit result in the case of the true hit result, and if the result of the success or failure judgment processing is an outlier, the number of the hold information on the special view side A longer variable display period is set to be easier to select than the case where there is a small number of cases, and the low frequency support mode is the one in the high frequency support mode when the result of the qualification process is a hit result. In the high-frequency support mode, the variable display period longer than in the case is set to be easy to select and the low-frequency support mode is selected if the result of the pass / fail judgment processing is an outlier. It is set more likely to be selected longer change display period than that. And since the table for the fluctuation display period is set in this way, the average value of the fluctuation display period becomes longer in the case where the result of the success or failure judgment processing is a hit result than in the case where the result is outliers, If the result of the type determination process is a high probability hit result, the average value of the fluctuation display period becomes longer than the case of a low probability hit result, and if the result of the success or failure determination process is a deviation result The average value of the variable display period is longer than the case where the number of pending information is small, and the average value of the fluctuation display period is longer than the high frequency support mode in the high frequency support mode when the result of the judgment process is success. If the average value of the fluctuation display period is longer than in a certain case, and the result of the judgment processing is outliers, the fluctuation table is better in the low frequency support mode than in the high frequency support mode. The average value of the period is longer. The average value of the fluctuation display period as a whole is longer in the low frequency support mode than in the high frequency support mode. Although a detailed description is omitted, effects such as increasing the player's sense of expectation are performed in the game display in the symbol display device 44 for the game round having a longer variable display period. For example, the number of effect characters that appear is greater in the game run where the variable display period is longer.

  Information on the fluctuation display period specified in the fluctuation display period specifying process is set to a timer counter provided in the main RAM 94. When information on the fluctuation display period is set in the timer counter, each time the timer update process (step S210) in step S210 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) is executed until the value of the timer counter becomes "0". It is subtracted.

  Thereafter, the variation command and the type command are transmitted to the sound side MPU 103 (step S410). The fluctuation command includes information on the fluctuation display period specified in step S409. The type command includes information on the game result (the result of the success or failure determination process and the result of the type determination process).

  Thereafter, the variation display table for the special view display unit 42a is read from the main ROM 93 to the main RAM 94 (step S411), and then the special view display unit 42a starts the variation display of the pattern (step S412). The variation display table for the special view display unit 42a is a table in which the variation display pattern of the design in the case of performing the variation display of the design in the special view display unit 42a is predetermined. When variation display of a pattern is executed in the special view display unit 42a, the same variation display table is used regardless of the result of the success / failure determination processing and the result of the type determination processing. When the variable display of the pattern is performed in the special view display unit 42a, the variable display of the pattern according to the predetermined pattern is repeated, but the variable display table for the special view display unit 42a is the pattern of the pattern according to the predetermined pattern. Control data for one rotation in the variable display is set. Therefore, when the variation display of the pattern is performed in the special view display unit 42a, the variation display table for the special view display unit 42a is repeatedly used until the variation display period determined in step S409 elapses.

  Thereafter, the value of the special drawing special charge counter is incremented by 1 (step S413). Since the value of the special figure special charge counter is “0” when the special figure change start processing is executed, the value of the special figure special charge counter that is the addition target by being incremented by 1 is processed during the special figure change ( It becomes "1" corresponding to step S306).

<Process content of the sound side MPU 103>
The information of the fluctuation display period read out as described above is set to the fluctuation command and transmitted to the sound light side MPU 103 as already described. Hereinafter, a processing configuration for performing execution control of effects for game circulation in the sound light side MPU 103 will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing repeatedly executed by the sound light side MPU 103 in a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 msec).

  First, table setting processing for performing processing corresponding to a command received from the main MPU 92 is executed (step S501). FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing table setting processing. When the variable command and the type command have been received from the main MPU 92 (step S601: YES), a game result storage process is executed (step S602). Specifically, based on the information included in the type command, the result of the success / failure determination processing and the type determination processing determined by the main MPU 92 at the start of the current game is identified, and the identified information is sounded Write to the side RAM 105.

  Thereafter, an effect lottery process for determining the content of the effect for the game run is executed (step S603). In the effect lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not to make advance notice display on the symbol display device 44 in the current game round. The notice display refers to a state in which symbol variation display is performed in all of the first variation display region 131, the second variation display region 132, and the third variation display region 133 in the symbol display device 44, or the first variation display region In 131, the variation display of the symbol is stopped, but in the situation where the variation display of the symbol is performed in both the second variation display area 132 and the third variation display area 133, the form of the symbol display device 44 is displayed as a notice This is a display effect that suggests the degree of expectation that a hit result will occur in the current game round, in other words, the degree of expectation that the reach variation display will be executed in the current game round, by adopting the mode for use. As a mode for notice display, a mode in which the background image of the symbol display device 44 is used as a background image for notice display, a mode in which a character image for notice display is displayed, and a type of symbol displayed variably for notice display The aspect etc. which are made into a kind are mentioned.

  In the effect lottery process, the effect lottery table corresponding to the variable command and type command received this time is read from the main ROM 93, and the value of the lottery counter whose value is periodically updated is read in the main RAM 94. Then, the value of the lottery counter is collated with the present effect lottery table, and the presence or absence of execution of the advance notice display and the type of notice display to be executed are determined. In this case, the probability that the advance notice is generated is set to be higher than the game times corresponding to the result when the game times corresponding to the hit result are out. In addition, the game display corresponding to the hit result is more likely to be selected than the game play corresponding to the result, the type of notice display having a high degree of expectation that the reach change display is executed. In addition, the game times corresponding to the high probability winning results are more likely to be selected the type of notice display having a high degree of expectation for the reach change display to be executed than the game times corresponding to the low probability hitting results. In addition, when the variation display period of the game play is long, the probability that the advance notice display occurs is set to be high, and the advance notice display of a type with high expectation for executing the reach change display is easily selected.

  After the effect lottery process is executed, the stop symbol determination process is executed (step S604). In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game run is a disappointing result, a stop result in which the same combination of symbols does not hold in the first change display area 131 and the second change display area 132 in the symbol display device 44 The corresponding information is determined as the information of the stop result of the current game run. In this case, since the winning effective period of the through winning portion 35 for distribution does not occur after the end of the game, the third change is not only the first change display area 131 and the second change display area 132 but the third change Also in the display area 133, the variable display of symbols is ended. Therefore, as the information of the stop result in this case, the kind of symbol to be stopped is determined not only for the first change display area 131 and the second change display area 132 but also for the third change display area 133. The combination of the stop symbols of the first change display area 131, the second change display area 132 and the third change display area 133 in the case of the out result is determined by lottery while preventing the combination of reach symbols and the combination of the same symbols. Be done.

  Further, in the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game is a low probability hit result, the combination with the same even symbols in the first change display area 131 and the second change display area 132 in the symbol display device 44 The information corresponding to the stop result that holds true is determined as the information of the stop result of the current game round. In this case, after the game run is over and the winning prize effective period of the distribution through winning portion 35 is started, the symbol in the third variation display area 133 is a state where the combination of reach symbols is formed by the same even symbol. Will be displayed. The type of reach symbol combination by this even symbol is determined by lottery. In addition, if the stop result of the current game round is a high probability hit result, in the stop result that the combination by the same odd symbol is established in the first change display area 131 and the second change display area 132 in the symbol display device 44 The corresponding information is determined as the information of the stop result of the current game run. In this case, after the game run is over and the winning prize effective period of the distribution through winning portion 35 is started, symbols in the third variation display area 133 with the combination of reach symbols formed by the same odd symbols Will be displayed. The type of combination of reach symbols by this odd symbol is determined by lottery.

  In addition, even when it is a low probability hitting result, a combination of reach symbols with the same odd number of symbols can be formed, and even when it is a high probability hitting result, a combination of reach symbols by the same even symbol May be formed. In this case, by using a combination of reach symbols, the odd symbols are more easily selected as a combination of reach symbols than when the high probability hit result is a low probability hit result. It becomes possible to notify the degree of expectation that it is a hit result. In addition, when it is the low probability hitting result, while the odd design is not selected as the combination of the reach design, when it is the high probability hitting result, the even design or the odd design is selected as the combination of the reach design It may be Also, a combination of reach symbols with odd symbols corresponds to a high probability hit result, and a combination of reach symbols with even symbols corresponds to a low probability hit result, the symbol of "3" or the symbol of "7" The combination of the reach symbols by some symbols may correspond to the high probability hit result, and the combination of the reach symbols by other symbols may correspond to the low probability hit result.

  Thereafter, the control table read process corresponding to the content of the execution of the effect in the current game run is executed (step S605). In the processing, the information of the fluctuation display period is specified from the contents of the command for fluctuation received this time, the information of the fluctuation display period, the information of the game result specified in the step S602, the effect lottery in the step S603 The control table corresponding to the combination of the information on the lottery result of the process and the information on the stop result determined in step S 604 is read out from the sound side ROM 104 and written in the sound side RAM 105. In the control table, the content of light emission control of the display light emitting unit 73 corresponding to the effect for the current game use, and the content of sound output control of the speaker unit 74 corresponding to the effect for the current game use are set. The light emission control of the display light emitting unit 73 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 74 are performed according to the control table.

  Thereafter, the variation pattern command is transmitted to the display MPU 113 (step S606). In the fluctuation pattern command, information of fluctuation display period of the game turn which is the start target, information of combination of stop symbols, information of execution presence / absence of notice display, and execution target when notice display is executed And information on the type of notice display. By receiving the variation pattern command, the display MPU 113 starts display control for executing effects in the game display on the symbol display device 44.

  Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16), after the table setting process is performed, the command transmission process is performed (step S502). In the command transmission process, when the transmission timing of the command set in the control table comes in the situation where the control table is read in the sound side RAM 105, the command of the type set in the control table Executes processing for transmitting to the display MPU 113.

  Thereafter, the light emission control process is executed (step S503), and the sound output control process is executed (step S504). In the light emission control process, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 73 is performed according to the table read to the sound light side RAM 105 in the table setting process of the step S501. Further, in the sound output control process, the sound output control of the speaker unit 74 is performed according to the table read to the sound light side RAM 105 in the table setting process of step S501. Thereafter, pointer update processing is executed (step S505). In the pointer updating process, information setting is performed to update data to be referred to in the table read out in the table setting process of step S501 to data corresponding to the next control process.

<Processing Content of Display MPU 113>
Next, a processing configuration for performing execution control of effects for game circulation by the display MPU 113 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process repeatedly activated in a cycle predetermined by the display MPU 113, specifically, in a cycle of 20 msec.

  In the V interrupt process, when a command is received from the sound light side MPU 103 (step S 701: YES), the display pattern table corresponding to the received command is read from the display side ROM 114 and written in the display side RAM 115 (step S 702) . For example, when the variation pattern command is received from the sound side MPU 103, the display pattern table of the type corresponding to the variation pattern command is read from the display side ROM 114 and written in the display side RAM 115. The display pattern table includes a variation display period in the current game run, the type of combination of stop symbols, presence or absence of execution of notice display, and type of notice display to be executed when notice display is executed. It corresponds to the combination. Therefore, the display control is executed by the display MPU 113 in accordance with the display pattern table, so that the game display effect is executed in the symbol display device 44 over the fluctuation display period determined by the main MPU 92. If it is decided to execute the advance notice display in the sound light side MPU 103, the advance notice display of the type determined by the sound light side MPU 103 is executed by the symbol display device 44 in the middle of the presentation for the game run Be done. Further, when the effect for the game use is ended, the combination of the stop symbols determined by the sound light side MPU 103 is displayed on the symbol display device 44.

  If a negative determination is made in step S701, or if the process of step S702 is performed, pointer update processing is performed (step S703). In the pointer update process, information setting is performed to update data to be referred to in the display pattern table read in step S702 to data corresponding to the current control process. Thereafter, task processing is executed (step S704). In task processing, calculation of parameters necessary for displaying an image of one frame corresponding to the update timing of this time on the symbol display device 44 is performed. Thereafter, a drawing list output process is executed (step S705). In the drawing list output process, a drawing list for causing the symbol display device 44 to display an image for one frame corresponding to the update timing of the current processing cycle is created, and the created drawing list is provided in the display control board 112. Send to VDP not shown. In this case, in the drawing list, an image grasped in the immediately preceding task processing is a drawing target, and information of parameters updated in the task processing is also set. The VDP causes the symbol display device 44 to display an image of one frame by creating drawing data in a frame area of a VRAM (not shown) according to the drawing list.

<Process during special map change>
Next, the special figure during variation process executed in step S306 of the special figure special power control process (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the case where the variation display period of the current game time in the special view display unit 42a has not elapsed (step S801: NO), and when it is the update timing of the display contents of the special view display unit 42a (step S802: YES) The data setting for updating the display contents of the special view display unit 42a is performed by referring to the variation display table for the special view display unit 42a read in step S411 in the special view change start process (FIG. 15) ( Step S803). Thereby, the display content of the pattern in the special view display unit 42a is updated to the display content of the next order.

  The mode at the start of the variable display of the pattern in the special view display unit 42a and the update mode of the variable display of the pattern are performed in a fixed mode regardless of the processing result of the acceptance determination process and the processing result of the type determination process. It is performed in a fixed manner regardless of the contents of the effects for game circulation in the symbol display device 44. For example, when a predetermined number of times of update timings occur, the display content of the pattern goes around and the display pattern in which the display order is constant is repeated, and the display pattern is repeated when the variable display period has elapsed. In any situation where the display of any order is being performed, the stop result determined at the start of the game play is displayed. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the display of the special view display unit 42a.

  On the other hand, when the variable display period has elapsed (step S801: YES), the information on the stop mode of the pattern of the special view display portion 42a stored in the main RAM 94 at the start of the game is read (step S804). Thereby, the variation display of the pattern is stopped in a state in which the pattern corresponding to the game result of the current game is displayed on the special view display unit 42a. The pattern of the symbols displayed stop in the special view display unit 42a is the effective period of the winning through distribution unit 35, the distribution execution mode and the open / close execution mode, regardless of whether it is in the special view display unit 42a. It is maintained until the next variable display of the pattern is started. Further, information on the final stop period (for example, 0.5 sec) is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 94 (step S805). Thereby, measurement of the final stop period is started.

  Thereafter, a final stop command is sent to the sound side MPU 103 (step S806). When the sound-side MPU 103 receives the final stop command from the main MPU 92, the sound-side MPU 103 transmits the final stop command to the display MPU 113 in the other process of step S628 in the table setting process (FIG. 17). When the final MPU 113 receives a final stop command from the sound-side MPU 103, the display MPU 113 causes the combination of stop symbols in the current game run to be stopped and displayed over the final stop period in step S702 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18). Read out the display pattern table for Thereby, in the symbol display device 44, the combination of stop symbols corresponding to the current game round is stopped and displayed over the final stop period.

  Thereafter, the value of the special drawing special charge counter is incremented by 1 (step S807). Since the value of the special figure special charge counter is “1” when the special figure changing process is executed, the value of the special figure special charge counter corresponds to the special figure determination special process (step S307) by being incremented by one. It will be "2".

<Processing during special feature confirmation>
Next, the special figure determination process executed in step S307 of the special figure special power control process (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  If the final stop period has elapsed (step S901: YES), and if the game result of the current game run is an out result (step S902: NO), clear the value of the special figure special power counter to "0". (Step S903). As a result, the value of the special figure special power counter becomes "0" corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process (step S305).

  If the final stop period has passed (step S901: YES), and if the game result of the current game run is a hit result (step S902: YES), the variable display table for the distribution display unit 42c is displayed. After reading from the main side ROM 93 to the main side RAM 94 (step S904), the distribution display unit 42c starts fluctuating display of the pattern (step S905). The variation display table for the distribution display unit 42c is a table in which the variation display pattern of the pattern in the case of performing the variation display of the pattern in the distribution display unit 42c is predetermined. When the variable display of the pattern is executed in the distribution display unit 42c, the same variable display table is used. When the variation display of the pattern is performed in the distribution display unit 42c, the variation display of the pattern according to the predetermined pattern is repeated, but the variation display table for the distribution display unit 42c is a pattern of the pattern according to the predetermined pattern. Control data for one rotation in the variable display is set. Therefore, when the variation display of the pattern is performed in the distribution display unit 42c, the variation display table for the distribution display unit 42c is repeatedly used until the distribution execution mode ends.

  Thereafter, the value of the special drawing special charge counter is incremented by 1 (step S906). Since the value of the special figure special charge counter is “2” when the special figure determination process is executed, the value of the special figure special charge counter that is the addition target by being incremented by 1 is the process of waiting for distribution ( It becomes "3" corresponding to step S308).

  Thereafter, a distribution display start command is transmitted to the sound side MPU 103 (step S 907). When the sound-light MPU 103 receives the distribution display start command from the main MPU 92, it makes an affirmative determination in step S607 in the table setting process (FIG. 17), and generates a control table corresponding to the distribution display start command. It is read from the light side ROM 104 to the sound side RAM 105 (step S608). In the control table, data of light emission control of the display light emitting portion 73 and data of sound output control of the speaker portion 74 in the winning combination effective period of the distribution through winning portion 35 are set. By referring to the control table, the light emitting effect corresponding to the winning effective period is executed in the display light emitting portion 73, and the sound output effect corresponding to the winning effective period is executed in the speaker portion 74. Also, the distribution display start command is transmitted to the display MPU 113 (step S609). When the display MPU 113 receives the distribution display start command from the sound MPU 103, it reads the display pattern table for continuing the reach fluctuation display in the winning prize period in step S702 in the V interruption process (FIG. 18). . Thereby, in the symbol display device 44, the variation display of the symbols is continued in the third variation display area 133 in a state where the combination of the reach symbols displayed stop when the effect for the game is over is stopped and displayed. . Further, in the symbol display device 44, as described above, the winning aim notification image 134 for notifying that the winning through of the distribution through winning portion 35 should be aimed is displayed.

<Distribution standby process>
Next, the distribution standby process executed in step S308 of the special figure special power control process (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the distribution standby process, first, update processing of the distribution display unit 42c is executed (step S1001). In the update process, when it is the update timing of the display contents of the distribution display unit 42c, refer to the variation display table for the distribution display unit 42c read out in step S904 in the special drawing confirmation process (FIG. 20). Thus, data setting for updating the display content of the distribution display unit 42c is performed. Thereby, the display content of the pattern in the distribution display unit 42c is updated to the display content in the next order.

  The mode at the start of the variable display of the pattern in the distribution display section 42c and the update mode of the variable display of the pattern are the types of hit results in the immediately preceding game and the duration of the variable display of the pattern in the distribution display section 42c. It is performed in a fixed mode irrespective of the content of the effect in the symbol display device 44 while being performed in a fixed mode irrespective of. For example, when a predetermined number of times of update timings occur, the display content of the design goes around and the display pattern in which the display order is constant is repeated, and the display is repeated if the distribution execution mode ends. Even in the situation where the display of any sequence of patterns is being performed, the stop result corresponding to the game result in the distribution execution mode is displayed. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for display control of the distribution display unit 42c.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a winning on the distribution through winning portion 35 has occurred (step S1002). Here, the determination as to whether or not a winning on the distribution through winning portion 35 has occurred occurs only in step S1002. As a result, the winning effective period for the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs only when the game round corresponding to the winning result is ended.

  If a winning on the distribution through winning portion 35 has occurred (step S1002: YES), the value of the distribution counter C3 is stored in the distribution execution area 125 (step S1003). Then, the distribution determination processing is executed using the numerical information stored in the distribution execution area 125 (step S1004). In the distribution determination process, the distribution table is read from the main ROM 93 to the main RAM 94, and the numerical information stored in the distribution execution area 125 is set as the first distribution execution mode in the distribution table. It is determined whether or not it matches any of.

  If the result of the distribution determination process is the first distribution execution mode (step S1005: YES), "1" is set to the first distribution execution flag provided in the main RAM 94 (step S1006). The first distribution execution flag is a flag for specifying the main MPU 92 as to which of the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode should be executed as the distribution execution mode, When the value of the first distribution execution flag is “1”, it is specified that the first distribution execution mode should be executed, and when the value of the first distribution execution flag is “0” Specifies that the second distribution execution mode should be performed. Note that the value of the first distribution execution flag is cleared to “0” when the distribution execution mode without transition to the opening / closing execution mode ends or when the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  Thereafter, the first distribution command is transmitted to the sound side MPU 103 (step S1007). When the sound-side MPU 103 receives the first distribution command from the main MPU 92, the sound-side MPU 103 makes an affirmative determination in step S610 in the table setting process (FIG. 17), and generates a control table corresponding to the first distribution command. It is read from the light side ROM 104 to the sound side RAM 105 (step S611). In the control table, data of light emission control of the display light emitting unit 73 in the first distribution execution mode and data of sound output control of the speaker unit 74 are set. By referring to the control table, the light emission effect corresponding to the first distribution execution mode is executed in the display light emitting section 73, and the sound output effect corresponding to the first distribution execution mode is executed in the speaker section 74. Be done. The light emission effect and the sound output effect corresponding to the first distribution execution mode are different from the light emission effect and the sound output effect corresponding to the second distribution execution mode. In addition, the first distribution command is transmitted to the display MPU 113 (step S612). When the display-side MPU 113 receives the first distribution command from the sound-side MPU 103, the display pattern for continuing the reach variation display in the first distribution execution mode in step S702 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18) Read the table Thereby, in the symbol display device 44, the variation display of the symbols is continued in the third variation display area 133 in a state where the combination of the reach symbols displayed stop when the effect for the game is over is stopped and displayed. . Further, in the symbol display device 44, as described above, the winning aim notification image 134 is displayed to notify that the sorting winning device 36 should aim for winning. Further, in the symbol display device 44, an image is displayed to make it possible for the player to recognize that the first distribution execution mode is the target of the current execution among the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode. Be done.

  On the other hand, if the result of the distribution determination process is the second distribution execution mode (step S1005: NO), the second distribution command is transmitted to the sound side MPU 103 (step S1008). When the sound-side MPU 103 receives the second distribution command from the main MPU 92, the sound-side MPU 103 makes an affirmative determination in step S613 in the table setting process (FIG. 17), and generates a control table corresponding to the second distribution command. It is read from the light side ROM 104 to the sound side RAM 105 (step S614). In the control table, data of light emission control of the display light emitting unit 73 in the second distribution execution mode and data of sound output control of the speaker unit 74 are set. By referring to the control table, the light emission effect corresponding to the second distribution execution mode is executed in the display light emitting section 73, and the sound output effect corresponding to the second distribution execution mode is executed in the speaker section 74. Be done. The light emission effect and the sound output effect corresponding to the second distribution execution mode are different from the light emission effect and the sound output effect corresponding to the first distribution execution mode. In addition, the second distribution command is transmitted to the display MPU 113 (step S615). When the display-side MPU 113 receives the second distribution command from the sound-side MPU 103, the display pattern for continuing the reach variation display in the second distribution execution mode in step S702 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18) Read the table Thereby, in the symbol display device 44, the variation display of the symbols is continued in the third variation display area 133 in a state where the combination of the reach symbols displayed stop when the effect for the game is over is stopped and displayed. . Further, in the symbol display device 44, as described above, the winning aim notification image 134 is displayed to notify that the sorting winning device 36 should aim for winning. Further, in the symbol display device 44, an image is displayed for making it possible for the player to recognize that the second distribution execution mode is the current execution target among the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode. Be done.

  Thereafter, information on the distribution opening period (for example, 3 seconds) is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 94 (step S1009). Thus, the measurement of the distribution opening period is started. Then, the value of the special drawing special charge counter is incremented by 1 (step S1010). Since the value of the special figure special power counter is “3” when the distribution standby process is executed, the value of the special figure special power counter corresponds to the distribution start process (step S309) by being added 1 It will be "4".

<Process for starting distribution>
Next, the distribution start process executed in step S309 of the special figure special power control process (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the distribution start process, first, update processing of the distribution display unit 42c is executed (step S1101). The processing content of the update processing is the same as the processing content of step S1001 in the distribution standby processing (FIG. 21).

  In the distribution start process, the distribution opening period has elapsed (step S1102: YES), and the first distribution execution flag of the main RAM 94 is set to “1” (step S1102). S1103: YES), "1" is set in the opening / closing number counter SOC provided in the main RAM 94, and "10" is set in the winning counter PC provided in the main RAM 94 (step S1104). The opening / closing number counter SOC is a counter for specifying, by the main MPU 92, the number of times of opening and closing the distribution inlet 61 of the distribution winning device 36 in the current distribution execution mode. The winning counter PC is a counter for specifying, by the main MPU 92, the remaining number of distribution upper limit numbers in the current distribution execution mode. The first distribution release period (specifically, 29 seconds) is set to the timer counter of the main RAM 94 (step S1105).

  On the other hand, when the distribution opening period has elapsed (step S1102: YES) and the value of the first distribution execution flag of the main RAM 94 is "0" (step S1103: NO), the main “2” is set to the open / close number counter SOC of the side RAM 94, and “10” is set to the winning counter PC of the main side RAM 94 (step S1106). Further, the second distribution release period (specifically, 0.5 sec) is set to the timer counter of the main RAM 94 (step S1107).

  When the process of step S1105 or step S1107 is executed, the release setting process for distribution is executed (step S1108). In the release setting process, “1” is set in the register corresponding to the drive unit 63 for distribution inlet in the main MPU 92. As a result, in the port output process of step S207 in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 13), the output of the drive signal to the drive section 63 for distribution inlet is started in order to switch the distribution inlet 61 to the open state. . In this case, if the process of step S1105 is performed, the distribution inlet 61 is opened in the long-time distribution mode, and if the process of step S1107 is performed, the short-time distribution mode is performed. The distribution inlet 61 is open.

  Thereafter, the distribution release command is transmitted to the sound side MPU 103 (step S1109). When the sound-side MPU 103 receives the distribution release command from the main MPU 92, it makes an affirmative determination in step S616 in the table setting process (FIG. 17), and the control table corresponding to the distribution release command is used as the sound side. It is read from the ROM 104 to the sound side RAM 105 (step S617). In the control table, data of light emission control of the display light emitting unit 73 and data of sound output control of the speaker unit 74 are set after the distribution opening period has elapsed in the distribution execution mode. By referring to the control table, the corresponding light emission effect is executed after the distribution opening period in the distribution execution mode has elapsed in the display light emission section 73, and distribution in the distribution execution mode is performed in the speaker section 74. After the opening period has elapsed, the corresponding sound output effect is executed. The light emission effect and the sound output effect are different between the case of the first distribution execution mode and the case of the second distribution execution mode. Further, the distribution release command is transmitted to the display MPU 113 (step S618). When the display-side MPU 113 receives the distribution release command from the sound-side MPU 103, it reads the display pattern table for continuing the reach fluctuation display in the distribution execution mode in step S702 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18). . Thereby, in the symbol display device 44, the variation display of the symbols is continued in the third variation display area 133 in a state where the combination of the reach symbols displayed stop when the effect for the game is over is stopped and displayed. . Further, in the symbol display device 44, as described above, the winning aim notification image 134 is displayed to notify that the sorting winning device 36 should aim for winning. Further, in the symbol display device 44, an image for making it possible for the player to recognize the execution target of the present time among the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode is displayed. Further, in the symbol display device 44, an image for making it possible for the player to recognize that the distribution inlet 61 is in the open state is displayed.

  Thereafter, the value of the special drawing special charge counter is incremented by 1 (step S1110). Since the value of the special figure special power counter is “4” when the distribution start process is executed, the value of the special figure special power counter corresponds to the distribution process (step S310) by being incremented by one. It will be 5 ".

<Process for distribution>
Next, the distribution process performed in step S310 of the special figure special power control process (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the distribution process, first, the update process of the distribution display unit 42c is executed (step S1201). The processing content of the update processing is the same as the processing content of step S1001 in the distribution standby processing (FIG. 21).

  In the process for distribution, on the condition that it is the timing to switch the switching piece 66 of the distribution winning device 36 from the retracted position to the V guidance position (step S1202: YES), "1" is set (step S1203). Thereby, in the port output process of step S207 in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 13), the output of the drive signal to the switching drive unit 67 is started to switch the switching piece 66 to the V induction position. The timing at which the switching piece 66 is switched to the V-lead position is the timing at which a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the opening of the distribution inlet 61 is first started in the distribution execution mode as described above.

  In the distribution process, a register corresponding to the switching piece 66 in the main MPU 92 is provided on the condition that it is the timing to return the switching piece 66 of the distribution winning device 36 from the V induction position to the retracted position Is cleared to "0" (step S1205). As a result, in the port output process of step S207 in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 13), the output of the drive signal to the switching drive unit 67 is stopped so as to switch the switching piece 66 to the retracted position. The timing at which the switching piece 66 is returned to the retracted position is the timing at which the V-lead continuation period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the switching piece 66 was switched to the V-guiding position, as described above.

  In the distribution process, on the condition that the game ball is detected by the V prize detection sensor 69 of the distribution prize device 36 (step S1206: YES), the V prize flag provided in the main RAM 94 is set to “1 Is set (step S1207). The V prize flag is a flag for specifying that the game ball has been detected by the V prize detection sensor 69 by the main MPU 92, and the V prize detection sensor 69 is used in a situation where "1" is already set. When the game ball is detected, the state in which the "1" is set is maintained.

  Thereafter, the V prize command is transmitted to the sound side MPU 103 (step S1208). When the sound-side MPU 103 receives a V prize command from the main MPU 92, it makes an affirmative determination in step S619 in the table setting process (FIG. 17), and a control table corresponding to the V prize command is received from the sound side ROM 104. It is read out to the sound light side RAM 105 (step S620). In the control table, data of light emission control of the display light emitting unit 73 and data of sound output control of the speaker unit 74 after the game ball is detected by the V prize detection sensor 69 are set. By referring to the control table, the light emitting effect corresponding to the occurrence of the V winning is performed in the display light emitting unit 73, and the sound output effect corresponding to the occurrence of the V winning in the speaker unit 74 is performed.

  Further, the V winning command is transmitted to the display MPU 113 (step S621). When the display-side MPU 113 receives the V prize command from the sound-light side MPU 103, the display-side MPU 113 performs notification that the V prize detection sensor 69 has detected the gaming ball in step S702 in the V interruption process (FIG. 18). Read out the display pattern table of. In this case, as the display pattern table, a first display pattern table corresponding to the occurrence of the V winning in the first distribution execution mode, and a second corresponding to the occurrence of the V prize in the second distribution execution mode. A display pattern table is provided. When the first display pattern table is read out, as shown in FIG. 9D, it is the same as the symbol forming the combination of reach symbols in the first change display area 131 and the second change display area 132. The display of the symbol display device 44 is controlled so that the symbol is stopped and displayed in the third change display area 133. Further, an image notifying that the V winning has occurred is displayed on the symbol display device 44 separately from the symbols in the respective variable display areas 131 to 133.

  On the other hand, when the second display pattern table is read out, as shown in FIG. 9F, the first variation display area 131 and the second variation display area 132 form a combination of reach symbols. The symbol display is different from the symbol, and when the variable display of the symbol is performed in the third variable display area 133, the symbol display is performed so as to be stopped and displayed in the third variable display area 133. The display 44 is controlled. Further, an image notifying that the V winning has occurred is displayed on the symbol display device 44 separately from the symbols in the respective variable display areas 131 to 133.

  In the distribution process, it is determined in step S1209 whether or not the distribution closing period is underway. The distribution closing period is a period from the end of the opening of the first distribution inlet 61 to the start of the opening of the second distribution inlet 61 in the second distribution execution mode. If the distribution closing period is not in progress (step S1209: NO), the distribution opening period set in the timer counter of the main RAM 94 (first distribution opening period, second distribution opening period, and third distribution opening period) Is determined (step S1213). If the distribution opening period has elapsed, a distribution closing setting process is executed (step S1214). In the closing setting process, the register corresponding to the drive unit 63 for distribution inlet in the main MPU 92 is cleared to “0”. As a result, in the port output process of step S207 in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 13), the output of the drive signal to the drive section 63 for distribution inlet is stopped in order to switch the distribution inlet 61 to the closed state. . Thereafter, the value of the opening / closing number counter SOC of the main side RAM 94 is decremented by 1 (step S1215), and the value of the opening / closing number counter SOC after the subtraction of 1 is "1" (step S1216: YES). The distribution close period (specifically, 6 sec) is set in the timer counter of the side RAM 94 (step S1217). Thus, measurement of the distribution closing period is started.

  If the distribution closing period is set, an affirmative determination is made in step S1209. When the distribution closing period has elapsed (step S1210: YES), the third distribution opening period (specifically, 15 sec) is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 94 (step S1211). Then, release setting processing for distribution is executed (step S1212). In the release setting process, “1” is set in the register corresponding to the drive unit 63 for distribution inlet in the main MPU 92. As a result, in the port output process of step S207 in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 13), the output of the drive signal to the drive section 63 for distribution inlet is started in order to switch the distribution inlet 61 to the open state. . In this case, the distribution inlet 61 is opened in the distribution side middle period mode.

  As a result of subtracting 1 from the value of the opening / closing number counter SOC of the main side RAM 94 in step S1215, when the value of the opening / closing number counter SOC becomes "0" (step S1216: NO), the distribution ending process of step S1222 is performed. Run. If it is determined in step S1213 that the distribution opening period has not elapsed, it is determined that the gaming ball is detected by either the count detection sensor 68 or the V prize detection sensor 69 of the distribution winning device 36. As a condition (step S1218: YES), the value of the winning counter PC in the main RAM 94 is decremented by 1 (step S1219), and the condition that the value of the winning counter PC is "0" (step S1220: YES) A closing setting process for distribution is executed as in S1214 (step S1221). Thereafter, distribution end processing is executed in step S1222.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the distribution end process of step S1222. When "1" is not set to the V prize flag in the main RAM 94 (step S1301: NO), the stop result setting process at the time of V prize non-occurrence is executed (step S1302). In the stop result setting process, the information of the stop mode of the pattern of the distribution display portion 42c corresponding to the fact that the game ball is not detected by the V prize detection sensor 69 is read out. As a result, the variation display of the pattern is stopped in a state in which the pattern corresponding to the occurrence of the V winning in the current distribution execution mode is displayed in the distribution display portion 42c. The pattern of the symbols displayed stop in the distribution display unit 42c is until the next variation display of the pattern in the distribution display unit 42c is started regardless of whether it is the game run execution period and the opening / closing execution mode or not. Maintained. The present invention is not limited to this, and when the distribution execution mode without transition to the open / close execution mode ends, or when the open / close execution mode ends, the display up to that in the distribution display unit 42c is It may be configured to be erased. In this case, the distribution display unit 42c may be configured to be in a state in which nothing is displayed, or may be configured to continue the display indicating that it is not changing.

  Thereafter, a game state transition process is executed (step S1303). In the game state transition process, if the winning result that triggered the current distribution execution mode is a low probability hit result, it is set to the state that the success or failure lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode Do. However, in the high frequency support mode, the game mode shifts to the low frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times). On the other hand, if the hit result that is the trigger of the current distribution execution mode is a high probability hit result, it is set to the state in which the success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. The high probability mode and the high frequency support mode continue until the result of the pass / fail judgment processing results in a hit result, and the transition to the winning prize effective period of the distribution through winning portion 35 thereby proceeds.

  Thereafter, flag clear processing is executed (step S1304). In the flag clear process, various flags used in the game run that triggered the execution of the current distribution execution mode and the various flags used in the current distribution execution mode are cleared to “0”. In addition, the value of the special figure special charge counter is cleared to "0" (step S1305). As a result, the value of the special figure special power counter becomes "0" corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process (step S305).

  On the other hand, when "1" is set to the V prize flag in the main RAM 94 (step S1301: YES), the stop result setting process at the occurrence of the V prize occurrence is executed (step S1306). In the stop result setting process, the information of the stop mode of the pattern of the distribution display portion 42c corresponding to the detection of the game ball by the V prize detection sensor 69 is read out. The information of the stop mode of this pattern is the information of the stop mode which is not selected in the stop result setting process at the time of V prize non-occurrence in step S1302. As a result, the variation display of the symbols is stopped in a state where the symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the V winning in the present sorting execution mode are displayed in the sorting display portion 42c. In step S1306, information on stop modes different from each other is read out when the current distribution execution mode is the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode. In other words, when the game ball is detected by the V prize detection sensor 69 in the first distribution execution mode and when the game ball is detected by the V prize detection sensor 69 in the second distribution execution mode, the shaking is performed. The stop mode of the pattern when the variable display of the pattern in the minute display portion 42c ends is different. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp from the display mode of the distribution display unit 42c whether the open / close execution mode generated thereafter is triggered by the occurrence of the V winning in any of the distribution execution modes. . Further, as already described, the aspect of the pattern stopped and displayed in the distribution display unit 42c is maintained until the next variable display of the pattern in the distribution display unit 42c is started. The display also continues. Thus, by confirming the distribution display unit 42c at an arbitrary timing in the open / close execution mode, it is determined that the distribution execution mode is triggered by the occurrence of the V winning in any of the distribution execution modes. It becomes possible to confirm.

  Thereafter, information on the special-charge opening period (for example, 3 seconds) is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 94 (step S1307). Thereby, measurement of the opening period for special power is started. In step S1308, it is determined whether or not the first distribution execution flag of the main RAM 94 is set to "1", so that the current distribution execution mode is the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution. It is determined which of the execution modes it is. If it is the first distribution execution mode (step S1308: YES), the first opening command is transmitted to the sound side MPU 103 (step S1309). If it is the second distribution execution mode (step S1308: NO), the second opening command is transmitted to the sound side MPU 103 (step S1310).

  When the sound-side MPU 103 receives the first opening command from the main MPU 92, it makes an affirmative determination in step S622 in the table setting process (FIG. 17), and the control table corresponding to the first opening command is It is read out from the ROM 104 to the sound side RAM 105 (step S623). In the control table, data of light emission control of the display light emitting unit 73 and data of sound output control of the speaker unit 74 in the open / close execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode are set. By referring to the control table, the light emission effect corresponding to the open / close execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode is executed in the display light emitting unit 73, and the speaker unit 74 executes the first distribution execution mode. A sound output effect corresponding to the open / close execution mode triggered is executed. In addition, the first opening command is transmitted to the display MPU 113 (step S 624). When the display-side MPU 113 receives the first opening command from the sound-side MPU 103, the display effect corresponding to the open / close execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode in step S702 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18) Read out the display pattern table for executing. As a result, display effect corresponding to the open / close execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode is executed in the symbol display device 44. The content of the display effect is different from the content of the display effect corresponding to the open / close execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode.

  When the sound-side MPU 103 receives the second opening command from the main MPU 92, the sound-side MPU 103 makes an affirmative determination in step S625 in the table setting process (FIG. 17) and sets the control table corresponding to the second opening command to the sound side. It is read from the ROM 104 to the sound side RAM 105 (step S 626). In the control table, data of light emission control of the display light emitting unit 73 and data of sound output control of the speaker unit 74 in the open / close execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode are set. By referring to the control table, the light emission effect corresponding to the open / close execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode is executed in the display light emission section 73, and the second distribution execution mode is A sound output effect corresponding to the open / close execution mode triggered is executed. Further, the second opening command is transmitted to the display MPU 113 (step S627). When the display side MPU 113 receives the second opening command from the sound side MPU 103, the display effect corresponding to the open / close execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode in step S702 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18) Read out the display pattern table for executing. Thereby, the display effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode is executed in the symbol display device 44. The content of the display effect is different from the content of the display effect corresponding to the open / close execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode.

  When the process of step S1309 or step S1310 is executed, the value of the special figure special power counter is incremented by 1 (step S1311). Since the value of the special figure special charge counter is “5” when the distribution process is executed, the value of the special figure special charge counter is “6” corresponding to the special charge start process (step S 311) by being incremented by one. It becomes.

<Special power start processing>
Next, the special power start process executed in step S311 of the special figure special power control process (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the special power start process, when the special power use opening period has elapsed (step S1401: YES), “15” is set in the round counter RC provided in the main RAM 94 (step S1402), and the winning of the main RAM 94 is achieved. Set "10" to the counter PC. The round counter RC is a counter for specifying the number of remaining round games in the opening / closing execution mode with the main MPU 92. In the opening / closing execution mode, the winning counter PC is a counter for specifying, by the main MPU 92, the remaining number of the upper limit number of winning possible to the special power winning device 37 in each round.

  Thereafter, the special game release period (specifically, 29 seconds) of the round game is set to the timer counter of the main RAM 94 (step S1404). Then, the special power release setting process is executed (step S1405). In the release setting process, “1” is set in the register corresponding to the drive unit 37 c for special power in the main MPU 92. As a result, in the port output process of step S207 in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 13), the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 37c for special power is started to switch the special winning opening 37a to the open state.

  Thereafter, an open command is transmitted to the sound side MPU 103 (step S1406). When the sound-side MPU 103 receives the release command from the main MPU 92, the sound-side MPU 103 transmits the release command to the display MPU 113 in the other process of step S628 in the table setting process (FIG. 17). When the display-side MPU 113 receives the release command from the sound-side MPU 103, the display-side MPU 113 executes display effect corresponding to the opening of the special winning opening 37a in step S702 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18). Read display pattern table. Thereby, in the symbol display device 44, a display effect corresponding to the opening of the special winning opening 37a is executed.

  Thereafter, the value of the special drawing special charge counter is incremented by 1 (step S1407). Since the value of the special figure special charge counter when the special charge start process is executed is "6", the value of the special figure special charge counter is "7" corresponding to the special charge open process (step S312) by being incremented by one. It becomes.

<Processing during special power release>
Next, the special power-on-release process executed in step S312 of the special figure special power control process (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  If the special power release period has not elapsed (step S1501: NO), the value of the winning counter PC is decremented by 1 (step S1502: YES), on condition that a winning to the special power prize device 37 has occurred (step S1502: YES) S1503). Then, if the value of the winning counter PC after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S1504: YES), the value of the round counter RC is decremented by 1 (step S1505). Further, even when the electric power release period has elapsed (step S1501: YES), the value of the round counter RC is decremented by 1 (step S1505).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the current open / close execution mode is triggered by the first distribution execution mode by determining whether or not the first distribution execution flag of the main RAM 94 is set to "1". (Step S1506). If the first distribution execution flag is set to "1" (step S1506: YES), the first special electric power closing period is set to the timer counter of the main RAM 94 (step S1507), and the first distribution execution flag is set. If "1" is not set (step S1506: NO), the second special power supply closing period is set to the timer counter of the main RAM 94 (step S1508).

  The second special power closing period is set to a time longer than the first special power closing period, as described above, and is further set to a time longer than the special power release period. Specifically, the first special power closing period is set to 2 seconds, while the second special power closing period is set to 60 seconds, which is twice or more of the special power release period. Moreover, the setting of the said 2nd electric power closing period is always performed between the round games of the said opening / closing execution mode. As a result, when transitioning to the open / close execution mode triggered by the detection of the gaming ball by the V prize detection sensor 69 in the second distribution execution mode, the V prize detection sensor 69 is selected in the first distribution execution mode. As compared with the case of transitioning to the open / close execution mode triggered by the detection of the gaming ball, the minimum time required to complete is longer.

  When the process of step S1507 or step S1508 is executed, the special power-use closing setting process is executed (step S1509). In the closing setting process, the register corresponding to the drive unit 37c for special power in the main MPU 92 is cleared to "0". As a result, in the port output process of step S207 in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 13), the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 37c for special power is stopped in order to switch the special winning opening 37a to the closed state.

  Thereafter, a closing command is transmitted to the sound side MPU 103 (step S1510). When the sound-side MPU 103 receives the closing command from the main MPU 92, the sound-side MPU 103 transmits the closing command to the display MPU 113 in the other process of step S628 in the table setting process (FIG. 17). When the display side MPU 113 receives the closing command from the sound side MPU 103, the display side MPU 113 executes a display effect corresponding to the closing of the special winning opening 37a in step S702 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18). Read display pattern table. Thereby, in the symbol display device 44, a display effect corresponding to the closing of the special winning opening 37a is executed.

  Thereafter, the value of the special drawing special charge counter is incremented by 1 (step S1511). Since the value of the special figure special charge counter is “7” when the special charge open process is executed, the value of the special figure special charge counter is “1”, and the value of the special figure special charge counter corresponds to the special charge closed process (step S313) “8” It becomes.

<Processing during special power closing>
Next, the special power on-duration process executed in step S313 of the special figure special power control process (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  If the value of the round counter RC is not "0" (step S1601: NO), the special charge closing period (the first special charge closing is confirmed by confirming whether or not the value of the timer counter of the main RAM 94 is "0". It is determined whether the period or the second special power supply closing period has elapsed (step S1602). If the special power closing period has elapsed (step S1602: YES), "10" is set in the winning counter PC of the main side RAM 94 (step S1603), and the special game opening period of the round game (specifically, 29 seconds) The timer counter of the main RAM 94 is set (step S1604). Thereafter, the release setting process for the special power is executed as in step S1405 in the special power start process (FIG. 25) (step S1605), and the open command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 103 as in step S1406 in the special power start process (FIG. 25). (Step S1606). Then, the value of the special drawing special charge counter is decremented by 1 (step S1607). Since the value of the special figure special charge counter is "8" when the special charge closed process is executed, the value of the special figure special charge counter corresponds to the special charge open process (step S312) by being decremented by one. It becomes ".

  On the other hand, when the value of the round counter RC is “0” (step S1601: YES), the ending command is transmitted to the sound side MPU 103 (step S1608). When the sound-side MPU 103 receives the ending command from the main MPU 92, the control table corresponding to the ending command is sounded from the sound-side ROM 104 in the other processing of step S628 in the table setting process (FIG. 17). The data is read out to the side RAM 105. In the control table, data of light emission control of the display light emitting unit 73 and data of sound output control of the speaker unit 74 in the ending period are set. By referring to the control table, the light emission effect corresponding to the ending period is performed in the display light emitting unit 73, and the sound output effect corresponding to the ending period is performed in the speaker unit 74. Further, the sound side MPU 103 transmits an ending command to the display side MPU 113. When the display MPU 113 receives the ending command from the sound light MPU 103, it reads the display pattern table for executing the display effect corresponding to the ending period in step S702 in the V interruption process (FIG. 18). Thus, the display effect corresponding to the ending period is executed in the symbol display device 44.

  Thereafter, information on the ending period (for example, 5 sec) is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 94 (step S1609). This starts measurement of the ending period. Then, the value of the special drawing special charge counter is incremented by 1 (step S1610). Since the value of the special figure special charge counter is "8" when the special charge closed process is executed, the value of the special figure special charge counter is "9" corresponding to the special charge termination process (step S314) by being incremented by one. It becomes.

<Special power termination processing>
Next, the special power termination process executed in step S314 of the special figure special power control process (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the special power termination process, when the ending period has elapsed (step S1701: YES), a game state transition process is executed (step S1702). In the game state transition process, if the hit result that triggered the opening and closing execution mode this time is a low probability hit result, it is set to a state where the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode . However, in the high frequency support mode, the game mode shifts to the low frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times). On the other hand, if the hit result that is the trigger of the opening / closing execution mode this time is the high probability hit result, it is set to the state in which the success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. The high probability mode and the high frequency support mode continue until the result of the pass / fail judgment processing results in a hit result, and the transition to the winning prize effective period of the distribution through winning portion 35 thereby proceeds.

  Thereafter, flag clear processing is executed (step S1703). In the flag clear process, various flags used in the game run that triggered the execution of the current distribution execution mode, various flags used in the current distribution execution mode, and various images used in the current opening / closing execution mode Clear the flag to "0". Also, the value of the special drawing special charge counter is cleared to "0" (step S1704). As a result, the value of the special figure special power counter becomes "0" corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process (step S305).

<A state where a game progresses>
Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 29 (a) shows the execution period of the game run, FIG. 29 (b) shows the timing when the winning on the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs, and FIG. 29 (c) shows the execution period of the distribution execution mode. 29 (d) shows the timing when the gaming ball is detected by the V prize detection sensor 69 of the distribution winning device 36, and FIG. 29 (e) shows the execution period of the open / close execution mode. f) shows a period in which the variation display of the pattern is executed in the special view display portion 42a, and FIG. 29 (g) shows a period in which the variation display of the pattern is executed in the distribution display portion 42c. h) is a period during which effects for game circulation are executed in the symbol display device 44 and a reach variation display is not executed, and FIG. 29 (i) executes a reach variation display in the symbol display device 44 Period (see Figure 29). ) Indicates a period in which a combination of three identical symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol display device 44.

  First, the case in which the out-of-order result in the success or failure determination process results in an error will be described.

  At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 29 (a), the game play is started, and as shown in FIG. 29 (f), the variation display of the pattern is started on the special view display unit 42a, As shown in 29 (h), the variable display of the symbol is started in each of the variable display areas 131 to 133 of the symbol display device 44. After that, at the timing of t2, when the variation display period of the game time has elapsed, the variation display of the pattern in the special view display unit 42a is ended as shown in FIG. 29 (f), and FIG. As shown, the variation display of the symbols in each of the variation display areas 131 to 133 of the symbol display device 44 is ended, and the current game round is ended as shown in FIG. 29 (a). In this case, in the special view display unit 42a, the result of the pass / fail determination process is out of display, and the pattern corresponding to the result is displayed in a stopped state. Further, in each of the variable display areas 131 to 133 of the symbol display device 44, combinations of symbols different from the combination of reach symbols and the combination of the same symbols are stopped and displayed.

  Next, a case will be described in which there is no transition to the open / close execution mode although the hit determination processing makes a hit result and shifts to the distribution execution mode.

  At the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 29 (a), the game play is started, and as shown in FIG. 29 (f), the variation display of the pattern is started in the special view display unit 42a, As shown in 29 (h), the variable display of the symbol is started in each of the variable display areas 131 to 133 of the symbol display device 44. Thereafter, at the timing of t4, when the variation display period of the game time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 29A, the current game time is ended. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 29F, the variation display of the pattern in the special view display unit 42a is ended. In this case, in the special view display unit 42a, the pattern corresponding to the result (low probability hit result or high probability hit result) of the result of the pass / fail determination processing is stopped and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 29 (h) and FIG. 29 (i), in the symbol display device 44, the first variation display region 131 is displayed from the situation where the symbol variation display is performed in each of the variation display regions 131 to 133. The second variation display area 132 is switched to a state in which the combination of the reach symbol is stopped and displayed and the third variation display area 133 is subjected to reach variation display in which variation display of the symbol is continued. By confirming that the reach variation display has been started, the player can clearly recognize that the winning combination term of the through winning portion 35 for distribution has been started.

  Further, at the timing of t4, which is the timing at which the game run is over, as shown in FIG. 29 (g), fluctuation display of symbols is started in the distribution display portion 42c. The administrator of the game hall, by checking whether the variation display of the pattern is being performed by the distribution display portion 42c in the situation where the reach variation display is being performed by the symbol display device 44, the reach fluctuation It becomes possible to grasp whether or not the display is normal.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 29B at time t5, a winning on the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs, whereby the distribution execution mode is started as shown in FIG. 29C. In addition, even when the distribution execution mode is started, as shown in FIG. 29 (g), fluctuation display of the pattern in the distribution display portion 42c is continued, and as shown in FIG. 29 (i). The reach change display on the symbol display device 44 is continued.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 29 (d), the distribution execution mode is performed as shown in FIG. 29 (c) at the timing of t6 without detection of the gaming ball by the V prize detection sensor 69 of the distribution winning device 36 occurring. finish. In this case, as shown in FIG. 29 (g), the variation display of the pattern in the distribution display unit 42c is ended at the timing of the time t6. When the variable display is ended, the pattern corresponding to the stop result when the V prize is not generated is stopped and displayed in the distribution display unit 42c. Further, as shown in FIG. 29 (i), the reach variation display on the symbol display device 44 is ended at the timing of the t6. When the variable display is ended, symbols different from the symbols constituting the combination of reach symbols in the third variable display area 133 of the symbol display device 44 are stopped and displayed. Thus, the player is informed that the open / close execution mode will not occur after the distribution execution mode.

  Next, a case will be described in which the hit determination process results in a hit result and the mode is shifted to the distribution execution mode, and further, the mode is shifted to the open / close execution mode after the end of the distribution execution mode.

  At the timing of t7, the game play is started as shown in FIG. 29 (a), and as shown in FIG. 29 (f), the variation display of the pattern is started on the special view display unit 42a, As shown in 29 (h), the variable display of the symbol is started in each of the variable display areas 131 to 133 of the symbol display device 44. After that, at the timing of t8, when the variation display period of the game time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 29A, the current game time is ended. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 29F, the variation display of the pattern in the special view display unit 42a is ended. In this case, in the special view display unit 42a, the pattern corresponding to the result (low probability hit result or high probability hit result) of the result of the pass / fail determination processing is stopped and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 29 (h) and FIG. 29 (i), in the symbol display device 44, the first variation display region 131 is displayed from the situation where the symbol variation display is performed in each of the variation display regions 131 to 133. The second variation display area 132 is switched to a state in which the combination of the reach symbol is stopped and displayed and the third variation display area 133 is subjected to reach variation display in which variation display of the symbol is continued. By confirming that the reach variation display has been started, the player can clearly recognize that the winning combination term of the through winning portion 35 for distribution has been started.

  Further, at the timing of t8, which is the timing at which the game run is over, as shown in FIG. The administrator of the game hall, by checking whether the variation display of the pattern is being performed by the distribution display portion 42c in the situation where the reach variation display is being performed by the symbol display device 44, the reach fluctuation It becomes possible to grasp whether or not the display is normal.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 29B at time t9, a winning on the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs, whereby the distribution execution mode is started as shown in FIG. 29C. In addition, even when the distribution execution mode is started, as shown in FIG. 29 (g), fluctuation display of the pattern in the distribution display portion 42c is continued, and as shown in FIG. 29 (i). The reach change display on the symbol display device 44 is continued.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 29D at t10, the V winning detection sensor 69 detects a game ball. In this case, at the timing of t10, as shown in FIGS. 29 (i) and 29 (j), in the third change display area 133 of the symbol display device 44, the same symbol as the symbol forming the combination of reach symbol Is stopped. As a result, in the symbol display device 44, the combination of the same symbol is stopped and displayed in each of the variable display areas 131 to 133. The distribution execution mode is continued as shown in FIG. 29 (c) even if a V prize is generated, and the variation display of the pattern on the distribution display portion 42c is continued as shown in FIG. 29 (g). Ru.

  Thereafter, the distribution execution mode ends at the timing of t11 as shown in FIG. 29 (c). In this case, as shown in FIG. 29 (g), the fluctuation display of the pattern in the distribution display unit 42c is ended at the timing of the time t11. When the variable display is ended, the pattern corresponding to the stop result at the occurrence of the V winning is stopped and displayed in the distribution display unit 42c. Then, at the timing of t11, the open / close execution mode is started as shown in FIG.

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  In the distribution execution mode, even if the game ball enters the distribution winning device 36, transition to the open / close execution mode does not occur if the game ball is not detected by the V prize detection sensor 69. Thus, in the distribution execution mode, the player not only enters the game ball into the distribution winning device 36, but the game ball having entered the distribution winning device 36 is detected by the V prize detection sensor 69. It will be expected. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation becomes gradual, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode are set as the distribution execution mode, and basically, in the first distribution execution mode, detection of the game ball in the V prize detection sensor 69 While, in the second distribution execution mode, detection of the gaming ball in the V prize detection sensor 69 does not occur. As a result, the player is expected to execute the first distribution execution mode. Therefore, the number of targets expected by the player increases, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, even if the first distribution execution mode is not selected in the distribution determination process, the second distribution execution mode is executed. As a result, when a prize for the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs and the distribution determination processing is executed, the distribution execution mode is executed regardless of the result of the distribution determination processing. The Rukoto. Therefore, it becomes possible to give many opportunities for the distribution execution mode to be executed, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  When the game ball is detected by the V prize detection sensor 69 in the distribution execution mode, an open / close execution mode is generated in which the special power prize device 37 is opened / closed. In this way, the special electric power winning a prize is in an open state from the situation where the game ball is made to enter the distribution winning device 36 in an open state triggered by the detection of the gaming ball by the V prize detection sensor 69 The state shifts to a state in which the game ball enters the device 37, and the state in which the game ball enters the open state is extended. Therefore, it is possible to secure a long game execution period for causing the game ball to enter the device in the open state.

  In the sorting execution mode, the sorting winning device 36 is in the open state, and in the opening / closing mode, the special power prize device 37 is in the opening state, so that the target for entering the ball changes according to each mode. Therefore, in a configuration in which a game is performed in which a game ball is made to enter an open state in any of the distribution execution mode and the open / close execution mode, the difference between the modes can be made clear It becomes possible.

  When the game ball enters the distribution winning device 36 in any of the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. As a result, even when the second distribution execution mode is generated, it is possible to prevent the degree of attention to the game from being extremely reduced.

  The total period during which the distribution winning device 36 is in the open state in either the first distribution execution mode or the second distribution execution mode is the distribution period to the distribution winning device 36 in relation to the firing cycle of the gaming balls. It is set to the period which enables the ball entry of the game ball of the division side upper limit number of objects. This makes it possible to reduce the player's sense of disadvantage for the occurrence of the second distribution execution mode.

  Even if the game ball is detected by the V prize detection sensor 69 in a situation other than the distribution execution mode, the open / close execution mode does not occur. It is highly possible that the game ball is detected by the V prize detection sensor 69 in a situation other than the distribution execution mode, which is likely to be caused by a fraudulent action, and in this case, the open / close execution mode is not generated. It is possible to prevent the provision of benefits for such fraud.

  The distribution execution mode is generated by causing the distribution through use winning portion 35 to enter the game ball. That is, in order to generate the open / close execution mode, the distribution execution mode is started by causing the distribution through winning portion 35 to enter the game ball first, and the distribution winning device 36 is started in the distribution execution mode. A game ball needs to be entered to generate a V winning. As a result, the target for aiming the game ball to enter the ball changes in stages, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. In this case, when the game ball enters the distribution through winning portion 35 during the winning period of the distribution through winning portion 35, transition to the distribution execution mode occurs, and the winning period Even if the game ball enters the through winning portion 35 for distribution in a period different from the one in the above, the transition to the distribution execution mode does not occur. As a result, it is possible to limit the situation in which the distribution execution mode is executed based on the game balls entering the distribution through winning portion 35.

  Different notification is executed in the symbol display device 44 depending on whether the V prize is generated in the first distribution execution mode and the V prize is generated in the second distribution execution mode. Similarly, different notification is performed in the distribution display unit 42c between the occurrence of the V prize in the first distribution execution mode and the occurrence of the V prize in the second distribution execution mode. As a result, it becomes possible to clearly grasp in which distribution execution mode the V winning has occurred.

  The variation display of the symbol is started in each of the variation display areas 131 to 133 of the symbol display device 44 when the success or failure determination process is executed, and the first winning prize period of the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs. Reach change display is performed in the third change display area 133 in a state in which the combination of reach design is stopped and displayed in the change display area 131 and the second change display area 132, and the reach change display of the through winning portion 35 for distribution It is continued also in the winning a prize effective period and the distribution execution mode. Then, when V prize winning occurs in the distribution execution mode, reach variation display in the third variation display area 133 is stopped in a state where the same symbol as the symbol forming the combination of reach symbols is stopped and displayed, When the distribution execution mode ends without the occurrence of the V prize, the reach change display in the third change display area 133 is stopped so that the combination of the same symbols is not displayed in a stopped state. Thus, not only are the game times being executed using the variable display of the symbols in each of the variable display areas 131 to 133 and the result of the success or failure judgment processing notified, but also the winning of the distribution through winning portion 35 It is informed that it is a valid period, that it is a distribution execution mode, and whether there is a V winning in the distribution execution mode. Therefore, it becomes possible to alert | report various information using the fluctuation display of the symbol in each fluctuation | variation display area 131-133.

  While the game is being executed, variation display of the pattern is performed by the special view display unit 42a, and when variation display of the pattern ends, the pattern corresponding to the result of the success or failure determination process is stopped and displayed. Further, in the winning combination effective period of the distribution through winning portion 35 and the distribution execution mode, the distribution display portion 42c performs the fluctuation display of the pattern, and when the fluctuation display of the pattern is finished, the distribution execution mode is performed. The symbol corresponding to the presence or absence of the V prize is stopped and displayed. As a result, in the configuration in which a series of effects are executed in the game turn, the pay-effective period of the through winning portion 35 for distribution, and the distribution execution mode in the respective variable display areas 131 to 133 of the symbol display device 44 By checking the section 42a and the distribution display section 42c, it becomes possible to individually monitor each period.

  When the winning combination valid period of the distribution through winning portion 35 is started, fluctuation display of the pattern in the distribution display portion 42c is started. Thereby, the administrator of the game hall or the like checks whether or not the variation display of the pattern has been started in the distribution display portion 42c, thereby determining whether or not the winning through term of the distribution through winning portion 35 has been started. It becomes possible to grasp clearly.

  The variable display of the symbols in the special view display portion 42a is ended before the winning period of the distribution through winning portion 35 is started. Thereby, the manager of the game hall can grasp whether or not the winning prize effective period of the through winning portion 35 for distribution occurring thereafter is regular by checking the special view display portion 42a. It becomes.

  The special view display unit 42 a and the distribution display unit 42 c are both directly controlled by the main MPU 92. This makes it possible to improve the reliability of the contents displayed on the special view display unit 42a and the distribution display unit 42c.

  In the open / close execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode, the electric power closing period between the rounds is longer than the open / close execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode. Then, in the open / close execution mode generated in response to the second distribution execution mode, notification of that is performed by the pachinko machine 10 itself, that is, by the symbol display device 44, the display light emitting unit 73 and the speaker unit 74. This makes it possible to make the manager of the game hall recognize the fact during the opening / closing execution mode, and to provide the manager with a sufficient time to cope with it. Furthermore, when the open / close execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode occurs due to the fraudulent act, it is possible to reduce the digestibility of the open / close execution mode, and the unit time due to the fraudulent action It is possible to reduce the amount of benefit gained per hit.

  Further, the period during closing of the special power winning device 37 in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode is longer than the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode. Since the period during closing is constant without depending on the situation where the game ball is being fired, etc., the period during such closing is extended to open / close based on the second distribution execution mode It is possible to reliably increase the length of the execution mode.

  Moreover, only the ending period is extended, and the open / close execution mode is not extended, but the special power closing period before the last round game is extended for a long time to extend the open / close execution mode Is planned. Thereby, when the occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode is caused by the fraudulent action, the fraudulent action is dealt with at a stage before the payout of the game ball in the opening / closing execution mode is completed. It is possible to

  Further, the upper limit number and the special power release period of each round game are the same in the open / close execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode and the open / close execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode. Thus, the open / close execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode is generated when the open / close execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode is generated as a result of the game being played regularly rather than an illegal action. It is possible to make payout of the game ball equivalent to

  When the result of the success or failure judgment processing is a hit result, the distribution execution mode is not executed corresponding to the result of the success or failure judgment processing or the type judgment processing, but is executed after the game is over The distribution execution mode of the type corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process executed with the game ball entering the distribution through winning unit 35 during the winning period of the through winning unit 35 is executed. Ru. In this way, the player performs the firing operation while expecting that the type of the distribution execution mode will be an advantageous type for the player in the prize winning period in which the distribution execution mode is determined to occur. Become. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Since the distribution determination process is executed based on the game ball entering the distribution through winning portion 35, it becomes possible to make the execution trigger of the distribution determination process clear. In addition, when the game ball enters the distribution through winning portion 35 during the above-mentioned winning period, not only the distribution determination processing is executed but also the distribution execution mode is started. This makes it possible to facilitate the understanding of the game content as compared with the configuration in which each opportunity is different.

  By performing variation display of the pattern on the distribution display unit 42c in the distribution execution mode, it is possible to grasp whether or not the distribution execution mode is being executed by confirming the distribution display unit 42c. It becomes. Further, in the configuration in which the transition to the open / close execution mode occurs and the transition to the open / close execution mode does not occur depending on whether or not the V winning is generated in the distribution execution mode, the distribution execution mode The stop result of the distribution display unit 42c changes in accordance with whether or not the V prize winning has occurred. Thus, the distribution display unit 42c is not only used as a display unit for notifying that the distribution execution mode is being executed, but also a display for notifying whether or not V winning has occurred in the distribution execution mode. It becomes possible to function as a part.

  The content of the stop result when the variable display of the pattern in the distribution display unit 42c ends corresponds to the presence or absence of the V winning in the distribution execution mode. Thereby, it is possible to grasp whether or not the V winning in the distribution execution mode has occurred by confirming the stop result in the case where the variation display of the pattern in the distribution display portion 42c ends. Therefore, it is possible to set the confirmation timing in the case of confirming whether or not the V prize winning has occurred by the content of the distribution display unit 42c to be an easy-to-understand timing.

Second Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the execution mode of the distribution execution mode is different from that of the first embodiment. The different configurations will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 30 is a time chart showing the operation mode of the distribution winning device 36 in each of the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode. 30 (a1) and 30 (a2) show the execution period of the distribution execution mode, and FIGS. 30 (b1) and 30 (b2) show the distribution open period of the distribution winning device 36, and FIG. c1) and FIG. 30 (c2) show the period in which the switching piece 66 of the distribution winning device 36 is disposed at the V-lead position.

  First, the first distribution execution mode will be described with reference to FIG. At the timing of t1, the first distribution execution mode is started as shown in FIG. 30 (a1), and the opening of the distribution inlet 61 is started as shown in FIG. 30 (b1). In this case, the distribution side long-term opening is performed.

  After that, opening of the distribution inlet 61 is first started at timing t2, and a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, whereby the switching piece 66 is V-guided from the retracted position as shown in FIG. 30 (c1). Switch to position. Thereafter, when the V-lead continuation period (for example, 3 sec) elapses from the timing of t2 at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 30 (c1), the switching piece 66 is switched from the V-lead position to the retracted position.

  In this case, in the first distribution execution mode, opening of the distribution inlet 61 according to the distribution-side long-term mode is first executed, and the switching piece 66 is switched to the V guiding position in relation to the game ball's firing cycle. As for the timing, even if the shooting operation is continued aiming at winning to the sorting winning device 36 before the start of the first sorting execution mode, the winning number for the sorting winning device 36 is surely at the upper limit number for sorting It is the timing which does not reach. Therefore, in the first distribution execution mode, if the shooting operation is continued with the aim of winning the distribution winning device 36, one of the gaming balls that have won the distribution inlet 61 is the V winning of the distribution winning device 36. The game ball is detected by the V prize detection sensor 69 by being surely guided to the passage area 65c. Then, the game ball is detected by the V prize detection sensor 69, so that the open / close execution mode is started after the end of the first distribution execution mode.

  Thereafter, when the distribution opening period corresponding to the distribution-side long-term mode elapses at the timing of t4, the distribution inlet 61 is closed as shown in FIG. 30 (b1). Then, at the subsequent timing of t5, the distribution inlet 61 is opened again as shown in FIG. 30 (b1). In this case, the distribution side short-term opening is performed.

  Thereafter, when the distribution opening period corresponding to the distribution side short-term mode elapses at the timing of t6, the distribution inlet 61 is closed as shown in FIG. 30 (b1), and as shown in FIG. 30 (a1) The first distribution execution mode ends. In addition, when the number of winning prizes for the distribution winning device 36 reaches the upper limit number on the distribution side before the distribution opening period elapses, the distribution inlet 61 is closed at a timing earlier than the timing of t6. The distribution execution mode ends. For example, when the number of winning prizes to the distribution winning device 36 reaches the upper limit number on the distribution side at a timing earlier than the timing of t4, the first distribution execution mode ends at that point, and the distribution side short-term mode Reopening of the distribution inlet 61 does not occur. However, even in this case, the first distribution execution mode ends after the opportunity for the game ball to be induced is generated in the V winning aisle area 65c as described above.

  Next, the second distribution execution mode will be described with reference to FIG. At the timing of t11, the second distribution execution mode is started as shown in FIG. 30 (a2), and the opening of the distribution inlet 61 is started as shown in FIG. 30 (b2). In this case, in the second distribution execution mode, the opening number of the distribution inlet 61 corresponds to the distribution side short-term mode. And, the distribution opening period in the distribution side short-term mode is shorter than the period required from the start of the opening of the distribution inlet 61 to the switching of the switching piece 66 to the V-induction position. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 30 (b2) and 30 (c2), the distribution inlet 61 is at the timing of t12 which is the timing before the timing of t13 at which the switching piece 66 is switched to the V induction position. It is closed. However, even if the distribution inlet 61 is closed, the second distribution execution mode does not end and continues.

  Thereafter, at timing t13, which is a state in which the second distribution execution mode is continued and in which the closing of the distribution inlet 61 is continued, the opening of the distribution inlet 61 is first started after the opening of the distribution inlet 61 is started. When the time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, the switching piece 66 is switched from the retracted position to the V guiding position as shown in FIG. 30 (c2). Thereafter, at the timing of t14 in which the second distribution execution mode is continued and the closing of the distribution inlet 61 is continued, the V-lead continuation period (for example, 3 sec) elapses from the timing of t13. As a result, as shown in FIG. 30 (c2), the switching piece 66 is switched from the V guiding position to the retracted position.

  In this case, since the opening mode of the distribution inlet 61 is the distribution side short-term mode in the first opening cycle in the second distribution execution mode, winning of the distribution winning device 36 does not occur in the first opening cycle. Probability is high. Further, even if a winning on the distribution winning device 36 occurs, a game ball which is properly dropped on the distributing winning device 36 and flows down at the timing when the first opening cycle ends is a branch on the distribution winning device 36 The longest period required for the passage 65 to reach the downstream side of the branch position to the V prize passage region 65c is the period from the end of the first opening cycle to the timing at which the switching piece 66 is switched to the V induction position. It is shorter than (timing of t12 to timing of t13). Therefore, even if the shooting operation is continued aiming at winning to the sorting winning device 36 in the second sorting execution mode, there is a possibility that the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 of the sorting winning device 36 Is low. Then, since the game ball is not detected by the V prize detection sensor 69, the open / close execution mode is not started after the end of the second distribution execution mode.

  As shown in FIG. 30 (b 2), the distribution inlet 61 is opened again at timing t 15 which is a timing after timing t 14 at which the switching piece 66 is switched from the V induction position to the retracted position. . The opening times of the distribution inlet 61 also correspond to the distribution side short-term mode. Thereafter, when the distribution opening period corresponding to the distribution side short-term mode elapses at the timing of t16, the distribution inlet 61 is closed as shown in FIG. 30 (b 2), and shown in FIG. 30 (a 2) Thus, the second distribution execution mode ends.

  As described above, in the first distribution execution mode, if the game ball aiming at winning in the distribution winning device 36 is normally fired, detection of the game ball in the V prize detection sensor 69 occurs, The open / close execution mode occurs after the end of the 1-split execution mode. On the other hand, in the second distribution execution mode, even if the game ball aiming for winning in the distribution winning device 36 is normally fired, detection of the game ball in the V prize detection sensor 69 basically occurs. There is no occurrence of the open / close execution mode after the end of the second distribution execution mode. As a result, the player is expected to generate the first distribution execution mode, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Also, in the first distribution execution mode, winning of game balls more than the distribution upper limit number to the distribution winning device 36 can occur, whereas in the second distribution execution mode, the distribution winning device 36 It is not possible to expect winnings of the game balls of the distribution side upper limit number or more. Furthermore, in the second distribution execution mode, there is a high possibility that a winning on the distribution winning device 36 will not occur. This makes it possible to increase the degree of advantage of the first distribution execution mode with respect to the second distribution execution mode.

Third Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the distribution standby process executed by the main MPU 92 is different from that of the first embodiment. The different configurations will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  In the distribution standby process, when a winning on the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs (step S1801: YES), the value of the distribution counter C3 is stored in the distribution execution area 125 (step S1801) S1802). Then, distribution determination processing is executed using the numerical information stored in the distribution execution area 125 (step S1803). In the distribution determination process, the distribution table is read from the main ROM 93 to the main RAM 94, and the numerical information stored in the distribution execution area 125 is set as the first distribution execution mode in the distribution table. It is determined whether or not it matches any of.

  Thereafter, the display table for the distribution display unit 42c is read from the main ROM 93 to the main RAM 94 (step S1804). In the display table for the distribution display unit 42c, data for specifying the display content of the distribution display unit 42c corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process is set. That is, in the display table, data for specifying the display content of the distribution display unit 42c corresponding to the first distribution execution mode, and the display content of the distribution display unit 42c corresponding to the second distribution execution mode And data for identifying the information. For example, when the distribution display unit 42c is a so-called 7-segment display, data for causing the distribution display unit 42c to display "1" as the display content of the distribution display unit 42c corresponding to the first distribution execution mode. Is set, and data for causing the distribution display unit 42c to display "2" is set as the display content of the distribution display unit 42c corresponding to the second distribution execution mode.

  Thereafter, the data corresponding to the result of the present distribution determination processing is specified from the display table for the distribution display portion 42c, and the specified data is set as data for display control of the distribution display portion 42c (step S1805) ). As a result, the result of the distribution determination process is displayed in the distribution display unit 42c. That is, in the present embodiment, when the distribution determination process is executed, the display corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process is performed by the distribution display unit 42c, and the distribution display unit 42c changes the pattern Display is not executed. Thus, when the distribution execution mode is started by displaying the result of the distribution determination process in the distribution display unit 42c, the distribution execution mode is the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution. The distribution display unit 42c can notify which of the minute execution modes it corresponds to.

  Further, when the distribution execution mode is started, the display corresponding to the result of the distribution determination processing displayed in the distribution display section 42c is the distribution execution mode not accompanied by the transition to the open / close execution mode. Is ended when the distribution execution mode is ended, and is ended when the opening / closing execution mode is ended when the opening / closing execution mode is generated. Thus, by confirming the distribution display unit 42c at an arbitrary timing in the situation where the distribution execution mode is being executed, the distribution execution mode is either the first distribution execution mode or the second distribution execution mode. It is possible to grasp whether it corresponds or not, and by confirming the distribution display unit 42c at any timing in the situation where the open / close execution mode is being executed, the open / close execution mode is the first distribution execution mode and the first distribution execution mode. It is possible to grasp which of the two distribution execution modes is the trigger.

  It should be noted that the transition to the open / close execution mode occurs instead of the configuration in which the display in the distribution display section 42c is erased at the end of the distribution execution mode without the transition to the open / close execution mode or at the end of the open / close execution mode. It may be configured to be erased at the end of the distribution execution mode regardless of whether it is or not, or may be configured to be erased when a new game play is started. Further, the distribution display unit 42c continues to display a pattern corresponding to the result of the previous distribution determination process, and when the distribution determination process is executed, the display of the pattern corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process is performed. The contents may be changed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the first distribution execution mode is selected in the distribution determination process in step S1803 (step S1806). If the first distribution execution mode is selected (step S1806: YES), "1" is set to the first distribution execution flag provided in the main RAM 94 (step S1807). The first distribution execution flag is a flag for specifying the main MPU 92 as to which of the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode should be executed as the distribution execution mode, When the value of the first distribution execution flag is “1”, it is specified that the first distribution execution mode should be executed, and when the value of the first distribution execution flag is “0” Specifies that the second distribution execution mode should be performed. Thereafter, the first distribution command is transmitted to the sound side MPU 103 (step S1808). The processing content of the sound light side MPU 103 and the display side MPU 113 when the first distribution command is transmitted from the main side MPU 92 is the same as that of the first embodiment.

  On the other hand, when the second distribution execution mode is selected (step S1806: NO), the second distribution command is transmitted to the sound side MPU 103 (step S1809). The processing content of the sound light side MPU 103 and the display side MPU 113 when the second distribution command is transmitted from the main side MPU 92 is the same as that of the first embodiment.

  When the process of step S1808 or step S1809 is executed, information of the distribution opening period (for example, 3 sec) is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 94 (step S1810). Thus, the measurement of the distribution opening period is started. Then, the value of the special drawing special charge counter is incremented by 1 (step S1811). Since the value of the special figure special power counter is “3” when the distribution standby process is executed, the value of the special figure special power counter corresponds to the distribution start process (step S309) by being incremented by one. It will be "4".

  In the present embodiment, in the distribution start process (FIG. 22) and the distribution process (FIG. 23), the process for updating the display content in the distribution display unit 42c is not executed.

  As described above, when the distribution determination process is executed, a display corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process is performed by the distribution display unit 42c. Thus, when the distribution execution mode is started by displaying the result of the distribution determination process in the distribution display unit 42c, the distribution execution mode is the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution. The distribution display unit 42c can notify which of the minute execution modes it corresponds to.

  When the distribution execution mode is started, the display corresponding to the result of the distribution determination processing displayed in the distribution display unit 42c is the distribution execution mode in which the transition to the open / close execution mode is not performed. It is ended when the distribution execution mode is ended, and is ended when the opening / closing execution mode is ended when the opening / closing execution mode is generated. Thus, by confirming the distribution display unit 42c at an arbitrary timing in the situation where the distribution execution mode is being executed, the distribution execution mode is either the first distribution execution mode or the second distribution execution mode. It is possible to grasp whether it corresponds or not, and by confirming the distribution display unit 42c at any timing in the situation where the open / close execution mode is being executed, the open / close execution mode is the first distribution execution mode and the first distribution execution mode. It is possible to grasp which of the two distribution execution modes is the trigger.

  The distribution display unit 42 c is directly controlled by the main MPU 92. This makes it possible to increase the reliability of the information displayed on the distribution display unit 42c.

  A special view display unit 42a is provided separately from the distribution display unit 42c, and variation display of patterns during game play is performed by the special view display unit 42a. Thereby, the display unit for notifying that the game is being executed and the result of the success / failure determination processing, and the display unit for notifying the result of the distribution determination processing include the special view display unit 42a and the distribution It will be separately provided as the display part 42c. Therefore, it becomes possible to monitor each content individually by confirming the special view display unit 42a and the distribution display unit 42c.

  In the present embodiment, when the winning combination period for the distribution through winning portion 35 is started, the variation display of the pattern is started by the distribution display portion 42c, and the winning through the distribution through winning portion 35 is performed. When the distribution determination process is executed and the pattern corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the pattern in the distribution display unit 42c may be ended. In this case, it is possible to grasp whether or not it is a winning effective period to the distribution through winning portion 35 by confirming whether or not the fluctuation display of the pattern is executed in the distribution display portion 42c. It becomes.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, a display unit directly controlled by the main MPU 92 is provided separately from the special view display unit 42a and the distribution display unit 42c, and in the distribution execution mode, the display unit changes the display of symbols. May be configured to In this case, similar to the distribution display section 42c in the first embodiment, the display section ends the variation display of the pattern depending on whether or not the V winning is generated in the distribution execution mode. The type of pattern to be stopped may be different.

Fourth Embodiment
In each of the above embodiments, when a prize for the distribution through prize portion 35 is generated in the prize winning period of the distribution through prize portion 35, the shift to the distribution execution mode is surely generated. In the present embodiment, it may happen that the shift to the distribution execution mode does not occur even if a winning on the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs in the winning period. In addition, when a prize for the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs, the probability that the transition to the distribution execution mode will be won is varied according to the gaming state. The different configurations will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  First, types of hit results in the present embodiment will be described. The winning result is selected in the type determination process (step S405) in the main MPU 92 as the winning result is obtained in the success / failure determination process (step S403) in the main MPU 92, as in the first embodiment. Although there are multiple types of winning results in common in that they become the start trigger of the winning effective period of the distribution through winning portion 35, the combination of the winning probability of the success / failure determination processing and the winning probability of the distribution determination processing It is an opportunity to change the type to a different type. However, even if the type of hit result is selected in the type determination process, the selected hit result is handled unless the transition to the open / close execution mode occurs with the game cycle in which the type determination process is executed. The setting of each winning probability is not performed.

  A type table 93a is provided in the main ROM 93 as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 32 (a) as data for selecting the type of hit result by lottery in the type determination process. FIG. 32 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the type table 93a. In the classification table 93a, the distribution results of the classification result to the classification counter C2 include the low probability hit result, the first high probability hit result, the second high probability hit result, the third high probability hit result, and the fourth high value. There is a hit result and a fifth high hit result. Specifically, in the type table 93a, among the type counters C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" correspond to the low probability hitting result, and "10 to 13" is the first high probability hitting result “14 to 17” corresponds to the second high probability hit result, “18 to 21” corresponds to the third high probability hit result, and “22 to 25” corresponds to the fourth "26 to 29" correspond to the fifth high probability hit result.

  The main ROM 93 is provided with a low probability table group 93b, a first high probability table group 93c, and a second high probability table group 93d, as shown in FIG. A third high probability table group 93e, a fourth high probability table group 93f, and a fifth high probability table group 93g are provided. If any of the winning results is selected in the type determination process in the predetermined game times and transition to the open / close execution mode occurs triggered by the predetermined game times, the type determination when the open / close execution mode is ended The setting of the gaming state corresponding to the hit result selected in the process is performed. Then, when the game play is performed in the game state, the success or failure determination processing is executed using the hit / fail table included in the table group 93b to 93g corresponding to the play state, and the shake is continued following the game play. When a winning effective period of the through-through winning portion 35 for a minute occurs, the sorting determination process is executed using the sorting table included in the table group 93b to 93g corresponding to the gaming state. A numerical range of the random number counter C1 which is a winning result in the success / failure determination process is set in the success / failure table. In addition, the numerical value range of the distribution counter C3 which is a winning result in the distribution determination process is set in the distribution table, and the numerical value range which is the winning result is the execution of the first distribution execution mode and the winning The numerical range of the distribution counter C3 and the numerical range of the distribution counter C3 which is to be won in the second distribution execution mode are set.

  FIG. 32C is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the table groups 93 b to 93 g corresponding to each hit result. When the low probability winning result is obtained, the winning probability of the success / failure determination processing is 1/40, and the winning probability of the distribution determination processing is 1/5. In this case, the combination probability to be a winning result in the success / failure determination process and to be a winning result for any of the distribution execution modes in the distribution determination process is 1/200. When it becomes the first high probability winning result, the winning probability of the success or failure judgment processing becomes 1⁄4 higher than the case of the low probability hitting result and the winning probability of the distribution judgment processing is the case of the low probability winning result The same probability is 1/5, and the combined probability is 1/20 higher than in the low probability hit result. In the case of the second high probability winning result, the winning probability of the success or failure judgment processing is 1/8 higher than that of the low probability hitting result and the winning probability of the distribution judging processing is lower than that of the low probability winning result The combination probability becomes 1/20, which is the same as that of the first high probability hit result. When it becomes the third high probability winning result, the winning probability of the yes or no judgment processing becomes 1/10 higher than the case of the low probability hitting result and the winning probability of the distribution judging processing is more than the case of the low probability hitting result The combination probability is lower than in the case of the first and second high probability hit results and is 1/25 higher than that in the low probability hit results. In the case of the fourth high probability winning result, the winning probability of the judgment process is 1/20 higher than that of the low probability hitting result and the winning probability of the distribution judging process is lower than that of the low probability hitting result The combination probability is 1/25, which is the same as the third high probability hit result. In the case of the fifth high probability winning result, the winning probability of the success or failure judgment processing becomes 1/40 which is the same as the case of the low probability hitting result and the winning probability of the distribution judgment processing is lower than that of the low probability winning result Also, the combination probability is lower than in the first to fourth high probability per-results and 1/40 higher than in the low probability per-perform results.

  As described above, when the qualification determination process and the distribution determination process are executed in a mode corresponding to any high probability hitting result, the qualification process and the distribution determination process are performed in a mode corresponding to the low probability hitting result The combined probability is higher than when it is performed. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of any high probability of being hit results.

  The types of combinations of the winning probability in the pass / fail judgment processing and the winning probability in the distribution judgment processing are different according to the type of the high probability hit result. As a result, it is possible to diversify setting modes of the winning probability of the success determination processing and the winning probability of the distribution determination processing, and it becomes possible to achieve diversification of the game accordingly.

  The above combination probability differs depending on the type of high probability hit result. This makes it possible to bring about advantages and disadvantages even in high probability hit results. In addition, the combination probability becomes equal to or less than 1/20 which is the upper limit reference probability regardless of which high probability per-hit result is triggered. This makes it possible to prevent the degree of advantage from becoming excessively high.

  There is a high probability per winning result where the winning probability of the sorting judgment processing is higher than other high probability per se results instead of the winning probability of the judgment processing becoming lower than other high probability per se results. There is a high probability winning result in which the selection probability in the sorting determination processing is lower than that in the other high probability hits, instead of the judgment probability in the determination processing being higher than that in the other high probability hits. As a result, it becomes possible to separately generate a situation in which the winning probability of the success or failure judgment process is high and a situation in which the winning probability of the distribution judgment process is high, and it is possible to diversify the object of increasing the degree of advantage. Become.

  Depending on the type of high probability winning result, one of the winning probability of the judgment process and the winning probability of the distribution judging process is higher than that of the low probability result and the other is the same as the low probability result. A situation arises. As a result, it becomes possible for one of the pass / fail judgment processing and the distribution judgment processing to have the same advantage as the low probability hit result while the other extremely increases the advantage compared to the low probability hit result. It becomes possible to add sharpness by the success / failure determination processing and the distribution determination processing.

  The fifth high probability winning result is the same as the case of the low probability winning result, but the winning probability of the distribution determination processing is 100%. In this case, if a winning result is obtained in the pass / fail judgment processing, and if a winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs in the winning period of the distribution through winning portion 35, transition to the distribution execution mode is certain Will occur. In this situation, the transition to the distribution execution mode will be decided if the winning result is the winning result in the pass / fail judgment processing, so the player's attention to the winning result in the pass / fail judgment processing may be increased. It becomes possible.

  Even if any of the table groups 93b to 93g is selected, the probability that the first distribution execution mode is selected in the distribution determination process is 1/1 of the case where the winning result is obtained in the distribution determination process. It is constant at two.

  Hereinafter, a processing configuration for enabling execution of the validity determination process and the distribution determination process corresponding to the above-described hit results will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the special figure fluctuation start process in the present embodiment. The special figure variation start process is executed in step S305 in the special figure special power control process (FIG. 14).

  In the special figure fluctuation start process, the data setting process is executed (step S1902) on condition that the number of the reserved information on the special figure side is one or more (step S1901: YES). In the data setting process, the same process as the data setting process (step S402) in the first embodiment is performed. Thereafter, a success or failure table corresponding to the current gaming state is read out from the main ROM 93 to the main RAM 94 (step S1903). Specifically, in the main RAM 94, as a flag for specifying the gaming state by the main MPU 92, a first high probability state flag, a second high probability state flag, a third high probability state flag, and a fourth high probability A status flag and a fifth high confidence status flag are provided. The state in which the first high certainty state flag is set to “1” is the first high certainty result, which means that it is the gaming state after the open / close execution mode is generated, and the second high certainty state flag The state in which "1" is set means the second high probability hit result and the gaming state after the open / close execution mode is generated thereafter, and "1" is set in the third high probability state flag. The presence state means the third high probability hit result and the game state after the open / close execution mode is generated, and the fourth high probability state flag is set to “1” the fourth high probability It means that it is a game state after the hit result and the open / close execution mode is generated, and the state in which the fifth high probability state flag is set to “1” is the fifth high probability hit result and then the open / close execution is performed A game after the mode has occurred It means that a state, all the state where "1" to the high probability state flag not set means that a gaming state after subsequent closing execution mode will result per low probability occurs.

  In step S1903, the states of the first to fifth high confidence state flags of the main RAM 94 are specified, and a yes / no table is read out from the table group corresponding to the specified result among the table groups 93b to 93g of the main ROM 93. Thereafter, in the hold information stored in the special drawing execution area 124, the numerical information acquired from the random number counter C1 is read out, and the read out numerical information is set as a result of the numerical information set in the read out table above. It is determined whether there is any match (step S1904).

  If the result of the success / failure determination process is a hit result (step S1905: YES), the type table 93a is read from the main ROM 93 to the main RAM 94 (step S1906). Since only one type table 93a is provided, the one type table 93a is read out. After that, the numerical value information acquired from the type counter C2 is read out from the holding information stored in the special drawing execution area 124, and the read numerical information is set in the type table 93a. The hit result, the second high probability hit result, the third high probability hit result, the fourth high probability hit result or the fifth high probability hit result is determined (step S1907).

  After the type determination process is executed, “1” is set to the flag of the main RAM 94 corresponding to the type of the hit result identified in the type determination process (step S1908). Specifically, the main RAM 94 has a low probability winning flag, a first high probability winning flag, a second high probability winning flag, a third high probability winning flag, a fourth high probability winning flag, and a fifth high probability winning flag. In the step S1908, among the winning flags, "1" is set only in the winning flag corresponding to the result of the type determination process.

  Thereafter, stop result setting processing for the hit result is executed (step S1909). Specifically, the information on the stop mode of the symbol to be finally displayed on the special view display unit 42a in the current game run is specified from the stop result table for the hit result stored in advance in the main ROM 93, The specified information is stored in the main RAM 94. In the stop result table for this hit result, the types of stop modes of the symbols to be stopped and displayed on the special view display unit 42a are set to be different for each type of the hit result, and in step S1909, in step S1907. The main RAM 94 stores information on the stop mode of the pattern according to the type of hit result identified. In addition, the stop mode of the pattern may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with each hit result, and the stop modes of a plurality of types of patterns may be set for at least a part of the hit results. Although the method of selecting a stop result for a hit result in which stop modes of a plurality of types of patterns are set is optional, for example, the stop result may be selected according to the value of the type counter C2.

  The processing content of step S 1910 to step S 1915 is the same as the processing content of step S 408 to step S 413 of the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 15) in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the distribution standby process in the present embodiment. The distribution standby process is executed in step S308 in the special figure electric power control process (FIG. 14).

  In the distribution standby process, first, an update process of the distribution display unit 42c is executed (step S2001). The fluctuation display of symbols in the distribution display unit 42c is started at step S905 in the special figure determination processing (FIG. 20) as in the first embodiment. Further, the processing content of the update processing is the same as step S1001 of the distribution standby processing (FIG. 21) in the first embodiment.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a winning on the distribution through winning portion 35 has occurred (step S2002). Here, the determination as to whether or not a winning on the distribution through winning portion 35 has occurred occurs only in step S2002. As a result, the winning effective period for the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs only when the game round corresponding to the winning result is ended.

  If a winning on the distribution through winning portion 35 has occurred (step S2002: YES), the value of the distribution counter C3 is stored in the distribution execution area 125 (step S2003). Thereafter, the states of the first to fifth high probability state flags of the main RAM 94 are specified, and the distribution table is read out to the main RAM 94 from the table group corresponding to the specified result among the table groups 93b to 93g of the main ROM 93 Thus, the distribution table corresponding to the current gaming state is read out (step S2004). FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram for describing a distribution table included in the low probability table group 93 b and the first high probability table group 93 c. In the distribution table, among the distribution counters C3 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 23” correspond to the result of deviation, and “24 to 26” correspond to the transition to the first distribution execution mode “27 to 29” correspond to the transition to the second distribution execution mode. In this case, the winning result is obtained with a probability of 1/5, and the transition to the first distribution execution mode occurs with a probability of 1/2 of the winning results and 1/1 of the winning results. A transition to the second distribution execution mode occurs with a probability of two.

  Then, in step S2005, it is determined whether the numerical information stored in the distribution execution area 125 matches any of the numerical information set as the winning result in the read distribution table. In the distribution determination process of step S2005, if the numerical information stored in the distribution execution area 125 matches the numerical information of the winning result, the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution are performed. It is determined whether any numerical information in the execution mode matches.

  If the result of the distribution determination process is the winning result (step S2006: YES), the stop result setting process at the time of distribution winning is executed (step S2007). Specifically, the information on the stop mode of the pattern to be stopped and displayed on the distribution display unit 42c is read out from the main ROM 93. The stop mode information of this pattern is different from the stop mode information when the first distribution execution mode is generated, when the second distribution execution mode is generated, and when any of the distribution execution modes is not generated. It is set. In step S2007, when the first distribution execution mode is selected in the distribution determination process, the information on the stop mode of the pattern corresponding to the first distribution execution mode is read out and the pattern according to the mode corresponding to the information is stopped The distribution display unit 42c is controlled to be displayed, and when the second distribution execution mode is selected in the distribution determination process, the information on the stop mode of the pattern corresponding to the second distribution execution mode is read out. At the same time, the distribution control unit 42 c controls the distribution display unit 42 c so as to stop and display the pattern according to the mode corresponding to the information.

  Thereafter, setting processing for the distribution execution mode is executed (step S2008). In the setting process, the same processes as steps S1005 to S1010 of the distribution standby process (FIG. 21) in the first embodiment are executed. Thereby, the transition setting to the first distribution execution mode or the second distribution execution mode is performed.

  Thereafter, the variation display table for the V winning determination display unit is read from the main ROM 93 to the main RAM 94 (step S2009), and then the variation display of symbols is started in the V winning determination display unit (step S2010). In this embodiment, since the result of the distribution determination process is displayed on the distribution display unit 42c, a display for notifying that the distribution execution mode is in progress and whether or not V winning has occurred in the distribution execution mode. A V prize determination display unit is separately provided as a part. The V prize determination display unit is configured of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. In this case, although it is impossible to perform complicated display such as the symbol display device 44 in the V prize determination display portion, it is possible to reduce the processing load for display control of the V prize determination display portion. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display. In addition, as a pattern displayed on the V prize determination display unit, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of colors May be displayed. The display range of the V prize determination display portion is narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 44. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the symbol display device 44 more than the V prize determination display portion.

  The variation display table for the V prize determination display unit is a table in which the variation display pattern of the pattern in the case of performing the variation display of the symbols in the V prize determination display unit is predetermined. When variable display of symbols is executed in the V prize determination display unit, the same variable display table is used. When variation display of symbols is performed in the V prize determination display unit, variation display of symbols according to a predetermined pattern is repeated, but the variation display table for the V prize determination display unit is a symbol of symbols according to the predetermined pattern. Control data for one rotation in the variable display is set. Therefore, when variation display of symbols is performed in the V prize determination display portion, the variation display table for the V prize determination display portion is repeatedly used until the distribution execution mode is ended. In step S1101 of the distribution start process (FIG. 22) and step S1201 of the distribution process (FIG. 23) in the present embodiment, the update process of the V prize determination display unit is not the update process of the distribution display unit 42c. Is executed based on the above-mentioned variable display table.

  If the result of the distribution determination process is a deviation result (step S2006: NO), a stop result setting process of the distribution deviation result is executed (step S2011). Specifically, the information of the stop mode of the pattern corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process being the out-of-range result is read out from the main side ROM 93. The information on the stop mode of this pattern is the information on the stop mode of the pattern not selected in the stop result setting process (step S2007) at the time of distribution winning. In step S2011, the distribution display unit 42c is displayed so that the information on the stop mode of the pattern corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process being a deviation result is read out and the pattern according to the mode corresponding to the information is stopped and displayed. Control.

  Thereafter, flag clear processing is executed (step S2012). In the flag clear process, various flags used in the current game run and the current winning prize effective period are cleared to "0". Further, the value of the special figure special charge counter is cleared to "0" (step S2013). As a result, the value of the special figure special power counter becomes "0" corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process (step S305).

  Here, if the result of the distribution determination process is out of alignment, the special figure change start process is performed without shifting to the distribution execution mode, but the game state transition process is not performed. Therefore, when the distribution determination processing results in an out result, the transition of the gaming state corresponding to the winning result that occurred in the game round that became the transition trigger to the winning combination effective period of the distribution through winning portion 35 this time That is, there is no change in the combination of the winning probability of the success determination process and the winning probability of the distribution determination process.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the distribution end process in the present embodiment. The distribution end process is executed in step S1222 in the distribution process (FIG. 23).

  In the distribution end process, when the V prize flag in the main RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2101: YES), the stop result setting process at the occurrence of the V prize occurrence is executed (step S2102). In the stop result setting process, the information of the stop mode of the symbol of the V prize determination display unit corresponding to the detection of the gaming ball by the V prize detection sensor 69 is read out. The information of the stop mode of this pattern is the information of the stop mode which is not selected in the stop result setting process at the time of V prize non-occurrence in step S2108. Thereby, the variation display of the symbols is stopped in a state where the symbol corresponding to the occurrence of the V winning in the present distribution execution mode is displayed in the V prize determination display portion. In step S2102, information on stop modes different from each other is read out when the current distribution execution mode is the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode. That is, in the first distribution execution mode, V is detected when the game ball is detected by the V prize detection sensor 69, and when the game ball is detected by the V prize detection sensor 69 in the second distribution execution mode, V The stop mode of the pattern when the variable display of the pattern in the prize determination display unit is finished is different. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp from the display mode of the V prize determination display unit whether the open / close execution mode to be generated thereafter is triggered by the occurrence of the V prize in any of the distribution execution modes. . In addition, since the aspect of the pattern stopped and displayed in the V prize determination display section is maintained until the next variable display of the pattern in the V prize determination display section is started, the display is continued even in the subsequent open / close execution mode Ru. Thereby, by confirming the V prize determination display portion at an arbitrary timing in the opening / closing execution mode, it is determined in which distribution execution mode the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the occurrence of the V prize. It becomes possible to confirm.

  Thereafter, in step S2103 to step S2107, the same process as step S1307 to step S1311 of the distribution end process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment is executed. As a result, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode.

  On the other hand, when the V prize flag in the main RAM 94 is not set to "1" (step S2101: NO), the stop result setting process is executed when the V prize is not generated (step S2108). In the stop result setting process, the information of the stop mode of the symbol of the V prize determination display unit corresponding to the fact that the game ball is not detected by the V prize detection sensor 69 is read out. As a result, the variation display of the symbols is stopped in a state where the symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the V winning in the current distribution execution mode are displayed in the V prize determination display unit. The mode of the symbols stopped and displayed in the V prize determination display section is until the variation display of the next pattern in the V prize determination display section is started regardless of whether or not the game period execution period and the opening / closing execution mode Maintained. In addition, it is not limited to this, and when the distribution execution mode without transition to the opening / closing execution mode is ended, or when the opening / closing execution mode is ended, the display until then in the V prize determination display portion is It may be configured to be erased. In this case, the V winning determination display unit may be configured not to display anything, or may be configured to continue display indicating non-variation.

  Thereafter, flag clear processing is executed (step S2109). In the flag clear process, various flags used in the current game run, the current winning prize effective period, and the current distribution execution mode are cleared to "0". In addition, the value of the special figure special charge counter is cleared to "0" (step S2110). As a result, the value of the special figure special power counter becomes "0" corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process (step S305).

  Here, when V prize winning does not occur in the distribution execution mode, the special view fluctuation start processing is executed without shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, but the gaming state transition processing is not executed. Therefore, when the V winning is not generated in the distribution execution mode, the transition of the gaming state corresponding to the hit result generated in the game times which became the transition trigger to the distribution execution mode this time, ie, the success or failure determination processing There is no change in the combination of the winning probability of and the winning probability of the distribution determination processing.

  FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing the game state transition process in the present embodiment. Note that the gaming state transition processing is executed in step S1702 in the special power termination processing (FIG. 28).

  In the gaming state transition process, when “1” is set in any of the first high probability winning flag, the second high probability winning flag, the third high probability winning flag, and the fourth high probability winning flag of the main side RAM 94 (Step S2201: YES), among the first high probability state flag, the second high probability state flag, the third high probability state flag, and the fourth high probability state flag of the main side RAM 94, the high level at which "1" is set The high certainty state flag corresponding to the certainty winning flag is set to "1" (step S2202). As a result, the high-probability table groups 93c to 93f corresponding to the current high-performing hit result are referred to in the determination processing and the distribution determination processing. The state of the high certainty state flag set here is held until the gaming state transition process (FIG. 37) is executed next time.

  Thereafter, the first high frequency support flag of the main RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2203). As a result, the support mode of the guidance unit 52 becomes the high frequency support mode. The state in which the first high frequency support flag is set to "1" is held until the gaming state transition process (FIG. 37) is executed next time. However, as in the first embodiment, in the case of any of the pay-effective period of the distribution through winning portion 35, the distribution execution mode and the opening / closing execution mode, the support mode is the high-frequency support mode until just before that. The support mode is set to the infrequent support mode, regardless of whether it has been set.

  After that, a state transition command corresponding to the high probability state flag in which “1” is set this time is transmitted to the sound side MPU 103 (step S2204). When the sound-side MPU 103 receives a state transition command from the main MPU 92, the control table corresponding to the state transition command in the current state transition command is processed in the table setting process (step S501) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16). To the sound light side RAM 105. Thereby, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 73 is executed in a mode corresponding to the current high probability hit result, and the sound output control of the speaker unit 74 is executed in a mode corresponding to the current high probability hit result. Further, the sound light side MPU 103 transmits a command corresponding to the state transition command received this time to the display side MPU 113. When the display MPU 113 receives the command, it reads the display pattern table corresponding to the command in step S702 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18), and executes display control of the symbol display device 44 based on the table.

  The display contents of the symbol display device 44 corresponding to the gaming state in which the success / failure determination process and the distribution determination process are executed using the second high probability table group 93d will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. Do. As shown in FIG. 38 (a), the probability display area 151 is displayed on the symbol display device 44 in a situation where the acceptance determination process and the distribution determination process are executed. In the probability display area 151, a probability corresponding image corresponding to the winning probability of the current success / failure determination process is displayed. In this case, the probability corresponding image is displayed based on the winning probability of the success / failure determination processing in the gaming state in which the success / failure determination processing and the distribution determination processing are executed using the low probability table group 93b. Specifically, when the second high probability table group 93d is referred to, the winning probability of the success / failure determination process is 1⁄4, and when the low probability table group 93b is referred to, the win It is 10 times the probability 1/40. Therefore, in the gaming state in which the second high probability table group 93 d is referred to, an image of “10 times” is displayed in the probability display area 151 as a probability corresponding image. On the other hand, the winning probability of the distribution determination process including the symbol display device 44 is not notified. As a result, it is possible to allow the player to predict the winning probability of the distribution determination processing while clearly indicating the winning probability of the success / failure determination processing to the player.

  Returning to the description of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 37), when the fifth high probability winning flag of the main RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2205: YES), the fifth high probability status flag of the main RAM 94 Is set to "1" (step S2206). As a result, the fifth high-probability table group 93g is referred to in the determination process and the distribution determination process. Further, similarly to step S2203, the first high frequency support flag of the main RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2207). As a result, the support mode of the guidance unit 52 becomes the high frequency support mode. Thereafter, a common transfer command is transmitted to the sound side MPU 103 (step S2208). The processing executed by the sound light side MPU 103 when the common transition command is received will be described later.

  In the gaming state transition process, when "1" is not set in any of the first to fifth winning flags of the main side RAM 94 (step S2205: NO), the first to fifth high probability state flags of the main side RAM 94 Is cleared to "0" (step S2209). As a result, the low probability table group 93b is referred to in the success / failure determination process and the distribution determination process. Further, "1" is set in the second high frequency support flag provided in the main RAM 94, and "100" is set in the termination reference counter provided in the main RAM 94 (step S2210). As a result, the support mode of the guidance unit 52 becomes the high frequency support mode. Also, the value of the end reference counter is decremented by one each time one game cycle is digested, and the second high frequency support flag is cleared to "0" when the value of the end reference counter becomes "0". As a result, when 100 games have been played, the support mode shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode. Thereafter, as in step S2208, the common transfer command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 103 (step S2211).

  When the sound-side MPU 103 receives the common transfer command from the main MPU 92, the control table corresponding to the common transfer command is sounded from the sound-side ROM 104 in the table setting process (step S501) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16). It is read to the light side RAM 105. Thus, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 73 is executed in a mode in which the player can not identify which one of the low probability table group 93 b and the fifth high probability table group 93 g is to be used. Sound output control of the speaker unit 74 is executed. Further, the sound light side MPU 103 transmits a command corresponding to the common shift command to the display side MPU 113. When the display MPU 113 receives the command, it reads the display pattern table corresponding to the command in step S702 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18), and executes display control of the symbol display device 44 based on the table.

  The display contents of the symbol display device 44 corresponding to the gaming state in which the probability determination process and the distribution determination process are executed using the low probability table group 93b or the fifth high probability table group 93g are shown in FIG. Description will be made with reference to the explanatory drawings. As shown in FIG. 38B, in the probability display area 151 of the symbol display device 44, an image of "normal" is displayed as the probability corresponding image. In addition, since the support mode of the induction unit 52 is set to the high-frequency support mode in either the low probability hit result or the fifth high probability hit result, the operation mode of the induction unit 52 From this point on, the player can not grasp which of the low probability table group 93b and the fifth high probability table group 93g is to be used. As a result, the player plays a game while predicting which of the low probability table group 93b and the fifth high probability table group 93g is to be used.

  In particular, when the fifth high probability table group 93g is to be used, although the winning probability of the success / failure determination process is the same as that of the low probability table group 93b, the winning probability of the distribution determination process is 100%. It has become. That is, the distribution execution mode will surely occur if the hit result in the success or failure judgment processing results. Then, when "normal" is displayed as the probability corresponding image in the probability display area 151 of the symbol display device 44, the player plays the game while expecting the fifth high probability table group 93g to be set. It will be.

  On the other hand, when 100 rounds of game times are digested when it becomes a low probability per hit result, while the support mode of induction unit 52 becomes a low frequency support mode, when it becomes the 5th high probability per win result The support mode of the induction unit 52 is kept in the high frequency support mode even if 100 game times have been digested. As a result, immediately after the end of the open / close execution mode, the player can predict which of the low probability table group 93b and the fifth high probability table group 93g is to be used, while the open / close execution mode is performed. When the game cycle is repeatedly executed without the occurrence of transition to the game mode, it is possible to make the player recognize which table group is to be used.

  According to the present embodiment described above, the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process may vary, and the probability of being won in the distribution execution mode may vary in the distribution determination process. . This makes it possible to diversify the execution mode of each determination process. Further, both the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process and the probability that the transition determination mode will be won in the distribution determination process are conditions in which the low probability table group 93b is used. It can be a different probability. This makes it possible to cause a situation in which the execution modes of both the success and failure judgment processing and the distribution judgment processing are simultaneously changing, and the contents of the game progressing through the results of these success and failure judgment processing and the distribution judgment processing are greatly increased. It can be made different. Therefore, the standardization of the game is suppressed, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the case of the present embodiment, in order to generate the transition to the open / close execution mode, it is necessary that at least the hit result is selected in the pass / fail judgment processing and the transition judgment to the distribution execution mode in the distribution judgment processing needs to be won. is there. Therefore, the number of lottery processes targeted by the player who expects the transition to the open / close execution mode will be plural, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, the probability of integrating the probability of winning results in the success / failure determination process and the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process affects the transition probability to the open / close execution mode. . In this case, as described above, the low probability table group 93b is used for both the probability of winning results in the success / failure determination processing and the probability of winning in the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination processing. It can be a different probability than the situation. This makes it possible to diversify the transition probability to the open / close execution mode, as compared with a configuration in which only one of the probability of success determination processing and the probability of distribution determination processing changes. In addition, the probability of selecting the winning result in the success / failure determination process and the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process greatly change the transition probability to the open / close execution mode It is possible to

  There are three or more types of probability that the hit result is selected in the propriety determination processing, and the probability that the transition determination mode will be won in the distribution execution mode. As a result, it is possible to diversify the probability of being a winning result in each determination process, and to diversify the combined probability of those determination processes.

  When the pass / fail judgment process and the distribution determination process are executed in a mode corresponding to any high probability hit result, the case where the pass / fail judgment process and the distribution decision process are executed in a mode corresponding to the low probability hit result The above combination probability becomes higher than that. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of any high probability of being hit results.

  The types of combinations of the winning probability in the pass / fail judgment processing and the winning probability in the distribution judgment processing are different according to the type of the high probability hit result. As a result, it is possible to diversify setting modes of the winning probability of the success determination processing and the winning probability of the distribution determination processing, and it becomes possible to achieve diversification of the game accordingly.

  The above combination probability differs depending on the type of high probability hit result. This makes it possible to bring about advantages and disadvantages even in high probability hit results. In addition, the combination probability becomes equal to or less than 1/20 which is the upper limit reference probability regardless of which high probability per-hit result is triggered. This makes it possible to prevent the degree of advantage from becoming excessively high.

  There is a high probability per winning result where the winning probability of the sorting judgment processing is higher than other high probability per se results instead of the winning probability of the judgment processing becoming lower than other high probability per se results. There is a high probability winning result in which the selection probability in the sorting determination processing is lower than that in the other high probability hits, instead of the judgment probability in the determination processing being higher than that in the other high probability hits. As a result, it becomes possible to separately generate a situation in which the winning probability of the success or failure judgment process is high and a situation in which the winning probability of the distribution judgment process is high, and it is possible to diversify the object of increasing the degree of advantage. Become.

  Depending on the type of high probability winning result, one of the winning probability of the judgment process and the winning probability of the distribution judging process is higher than that of the low probability result and the other is the same as the low probability result. A situation arises. As a result, it becomes possible for one of the success / failure determination processing and the distribution determination processing to have the same advantage as the case of the low probability hit result while the other extremely increases the advantage degree compared to the low probability hit result. It becomes possible to add sharpness by the propriety determination processing and the distribution determination processing.

  The fifth high probability winning result is the same as the case of the low probability winning result, but the winning probability of the distribution determination processing is 100%. In this case, if a winning result is obtained in the pass / fail judgment processing, and if a winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs in the winning period of the distribution through winning portion 35, transition to the distribution execution mode is certain Will occur. In this situation, the transition to the distribution execution mode will be decided if the winning result is the winning result in the pass / fail judgment processing, so the player's attention to the winning result in the pass / fail judgment processing may be increased. It becomes possible.

  By the occurrence of the V prize, the probability that the winning result is selected in the qualification determination process and the probability that the transition to the distribution execution mode will be won in the distribution determination processing may fluctuate collectively. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand the timing at which each probability fluctuates.

Fifth Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration for setting the winning probability of the success / failure determination processing and the winning probability of the distribution determination processing is different from that of the fourth embodiment. The different configurations will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the fourth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing the game state transition processing in the present embodiment. Note that the gaming state transition processing is executed in step S1702 in the special power termination processing (FIG. 28).

  In the gaming state transition process, when the game result of the game times generated prior to the current opening / closing execution mode is a high probability winning result (step S2301: YES), probability lottery processing of success or failure determination is executed (step S2302). In the present embodiment, only one type of high probability hit results. Probability lottery process of success or failure determination, the winning probability of the success or failure determination process is determined by lottery. FIG. 40 (a) is an explanatory view for explaining the winning probability of the qualification process which can be selected in the probability lottery process of the qualification judgment.

  As the selection target selection probability of the success / failure determination processing, 1/4, 1/5, 1/8, 1/10, and 1/20 higher than the selection probability in the low probability are set. Probability determination probability of success or failure The selection probability of each selection target selection probability is all the same, specifically, the probability that each selection target selection probability is selected is all 20%. In the probability lottery process of the success or failure determination, first, the probability lottery table for success or failure determination is read out from the main side ROM 93, and thereafter, numerical information is acquired from the lottery counter for success or failure periodically updated in the main side RAM 94. Then, the acquired numerical information is collated with the probability lottery table for determination of success or failure.

  After executing the probability lottery process (step S2302) of the determination of success or failure, the selected winning probability is set by setting “1” to the flag of the main RAM 94 corresponding to the winning probability selected in the probability lottery process. Is set as the winning probability of the success / failure determination process (step S2303). Thereby, until step S 2303 is executed next time, in step S 1904 of the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 33), the success / failure determination process is executed with the winning probability corresponding to the flag in which “1” is set.

  Thereafter, a probability lottery process of distribution determination is executed (step S2304). Probability lottery process of distribution determination The winning probability of the distribution determination process is determined by lottery. FIG. 40 (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the winning probability of the distribution determination process that can be selected in the distribution lottery process.

  1/5, 2/5, 3/5, 4/5, and 1/1 are set as the selection target selection probability of the distribution determination process. Probability of distribution determination The selection probability of each selection target selection probability in the lottery process is all the same, specifically, the probability that each selection target selection probability is selected is all 20%. In the distribution process probability lottery process, the distribution ROM table 93 is first read from the main ROM 93, and thereafter, the main RAM 94 acquires numerical information from the distribution lottery counter periodically updated. Then, the acquired numerical information is collated with the probability lottery table for distribution determination.

  After the probability lottery process of distribution determination (step S2304) is executed, the product of the winning probability of the success or failure determination process set in step S2303 and the winning probability of the distribution determination process selected in step S2304 is obtained. The calculation is made (step S2305). Then, it is determined whether the combined probability of the integration result is less than or equal to a predetermined value (step S2306). The predetermined value is set to 1/10. Therefore, for example, when 1⁄4 is selected as the winning probability of the success / failure determination processing, the above integration result is predetermined when 1⁄5 or 2⁄5 is selected as the winning probability of the distribution determination processing. When the probability is smaller than the value and 3/5, 4/5 or 1/1 is selected as the winning probability of the distribution determination process, the above integration result does not become smaller than the predetermined value. Further, for example, when 1/10 or 1/20 is selected as the winning probability of the success / failure determination processing, the above integration result is predetermined even if any winning probability is selected as the winning probability of the distribution determination processing. It becomes less than the value.

  If the integration result is not equal to or less than the predetermined value (step S2306: NO), probability correction processing of distribution determination is executed (step S2307). In the probability correction process, the winning probability of a value lower than the winning probability of the currently selected distribution determination processing and the second largest of the winning probability is set as a selection target. Then, the processing of step S2305 and step S2306 is executed again for the winning probability, and the processing of step S2305 to step S2307 is repeated until the combined probability of the integration result becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value.

  If the integration result is equal to or less than the predetermined value (step S2306: YES), the current state is selected by setting “1” in the flag of the main RAM 94 corresponding to the winning probability of the currently selected distribution determination process. The selected winning probability is set as the winning probability of the distribution determination process (step S2308). After that, similarly to step S2203 and step S2207 of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 37) in the fourth embodiment, the first high frequency support flag of the main RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2309). As a result, the support mode of the guidance unit 52 becomes the high frequency support mode. Also, a state transition command is transmitted to the sound side MPU 103 (step S 2310). As a result, the winning probability of the success / failure determination process selected this time in the display light emitting unit 73, the speaker unit 74, and the symbol display device 44 and the winning probability of the distribution determination process are notified.

  In the gaming state transition process, when the game result of the game times generated before the current opening and closing execution mode is a low probability hit result (step S2301: NO), the setting process of the initial probability of the pass / fail judgment is executed (step S2311) ). In the setting process, the main RAM 94 is selected so that the winning probability of the success / failure judging process is 1/40, which is a winning probability lower than all the selection target winning probabilities that can be selected when the high probability winning result is obtained. Execute flag setting processing. Further, the setting process of the initial probability of the distribution determination is executed (step S2312). In the setting process, the flag of the main RAM 94 so that the winning probability of the sorting determination processing is 1/5 which is the lowest winning probability in the selection target winning probability that can be selected when the high probability winning result is obtained. Execute the setting process of

  After that, similarly to step S2210 of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 37) in the fourth embodiment, the second high frequency support flag of the main RAM 94 is set to “1” and the end reference counter of the main RAM 94. "100" is set (step S2313). As a result, the high frequency support mode is set with the upper limit of 100 game runs. Also, a low probability transition command is sent to the sound side MPU 103 (step S2314). As a result, in the display light emitting unit 73, the speaker unit 74 and the symbol display device 44, it is informed that both the winning probability of the success / failure determination processing and the winning probability of the distribution determination processing are the lowest probability.

  According to the present embodiment described above, each of the probability that the winning result is selected in the qualification determination processing and the probability that the transition to the distribution execution mode will be won in the distribution determination processing is an individual lottery processing. It is selected. This makes it possible to diversify the aspect of the combination of each probability.

  If the combined probability obtained by integrating the probability that the winning result is selected in the propriety determination process and the probability that the transition to the distribution execution mode will be won in the distribution determination process is greater than a predetermined value, the combined probability is a predetermined value In the distribution determination process, the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode is corrected as follows. Thus, in the configuration, each of the probability that the winning result is selected in the propriety determination processing and the probability that the transition to the distribution execution mode will be won in the distribution determination processing is selected in the individual lottery processing. It is possible to bring their combined probability within a predetermined probability range.

Sixth Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration for setting the winning probability of the success / failure determination processing and the winning probability of the distribution determination processing is different from that of the fourth embodiment. The different configurations will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the fourth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing processing during special figure determination in the present embodiment. Incidentally, the processing while special drawing is determined is executed in step S307 in the special drawing special power control processing (FIG. 14).

  If the final stop period has passed (step S2401: YES), and if the game result of the current game is out of step (step S2402: NO), clear the value of the special figure special power counter to "0". Step S2403. As a result, the value of the special figure special power counter becomes "0" corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process (step S305).

  If the final stop period has elapsed (step S2401: YES), and if the game result of the current game run is a hit result (step S2402: YES), the variation display table for the distribution display unit 42c is displayed. After reading from the main side ROM 93 to the main side RAM 94 (step S2404), the distribution display unit 42c starts fluctuating display of the pattern (step S2405). Thereafter, the value of the special drawing special charge counter is incremented by 1 (step S2406). Thereafter, a distribution display start command is transmitted to the sound side MPU 103 (step S2407). The processing contents of these steps S2404 to S2407 are the same as the processing contents of steps S904 to S907 of the special figure determination processing (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment.

  Thereafter, the first gaming state transition process is executed (step S2408). That is, the first gaming state transition process is executed when the hit game result is ended. In other words, the first gaming state transition process is executed regardless of the winning combination valid period of the distribution through winning portion 35 and the game content of the distribution execution mode. In the first game state transition process, a process for changing the winning probability of the success or failure judgment process is executed as described later, but the first game state transition process is the game contents of the above-mentioned winning period and distribution execution mode By being executed independently, the winning probability of the success / failure determination process may vary without transition to the distribution execution mode, and may vary even without transition to the open / close execution mode.

  FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing the first gaming state transition processing. First, it is determined whether it is a high probability hit result of the pass / fail determination process (step S2501). In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, one of the high probability winning result and the low probability hitting result is selected in the type determination processing that is executed when a hit result is obtained in the success / failure determination processing. Even when the distribution determination process results in a winning result, either the high probability winning result or the low probability winning result is selected using the lottery counter and the lottery table other than the type determination process. That is, there are high probability per win result and low probability per win result of the pass / fail judgment processing, and there are also high probability per win result and low probability per win result of the distribution judgment processing.

  If it is a high probability hit result of the success or failure determination process (step S2501: YES), the probability lottery process of the success or failure determination is executed (step S2502). In the probability lottery process of the success or failure determination, as in step S2302 of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 39) in the fifth embodiment, 1⁄4, 1⁄5 set as the selection object selection probability of the success or failure determination process. And one winning probability is selected from 1/8, 1/10 and 1/20.

  Thereafter, the product of the winning probability of the success / failure determination process selected in step S2502 and the current winning probability of the distribution determination process is calculated (step S2503). Then, it is determined whether the integration result is equal to or less than a predetermined value (step S2504). The predetermined value is set to 1/10. Therefore, for example, when 1/1 is selected as the selection probability of the distribution determination processing, the integration result is a predetermined value when 1/10 or 1/20 is selected as the selection probability of the qualification determination processing. The following is the case, and in the case where 1⁄4, 1⁄5 or 1⁄8 is selected as the winning probability of the success / failure determination process, the above integration result does not fall below the predetermined value.

  If the combined probability of the integration result is not equal to or less than the predetermined value (step S2504: NO), the probability correction process of the determination of success or failure is executed (step S2505). In the probability correction process, a winning probability that is lower than the winning probability of the currently selected success / failure determination process and is the second largest value is set as a selection target. Then, the processing of step S2503 and step S2504 is executed again for the winning probability, and the processing of step S2503 to step S2505 is repeated until the combined probability of the integration result becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value. When the combined probability of the integration result is equal to or less than the predetermined value (step S2504: YES), the current state is set by setting the flag of the main RAM 94 corresponding to the winning probability of the currently selected success / failure determination process to "1". The selected winning probability is set as the winning probability of the success or failure determination process (step S2506).

  When it is not a high probability hit result of the pass / fail judgment process (step S2501: NO), a setting process of the initial probability of the pass / fail judgment is executed (step S2507). In the setting process, the main RAM 94 is selected so that the winning probability of the success / failure judging process is 1/40, which is a winning probability lower than all the selection target winning probabilities that can be selected when the high probability winning result is obtained. Execute flag setting processing.

  FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing the second gaming state transition processing. The second gaming state transition process is executed instead of the gaming state transition process at step S1702 in the special power termination process (FIG. 28).

  If it is a high probability hit result of the distribution determination process (step S2601: YES), the probability lottery process of distribution determination is executed (step S2602). In the distribution process probability lottery process, as in step S2304 of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 39) in the fifth embodiment, 1/5, 2 set as the selection object selection probability of the distribution process. Select one winning probability from / 5, 3/5, 4/5 and 1/1.

  Thereafter, the product of the current winning probability of the success / failure determination processing and the winning probability of the distribution determination processing selected in step S2602 is calculated (step S2603). Then, it is determined whether the combined probability of the integration result is equal to or less than a predetermined value (step S2604). The predetermined value is set to 1/10 as already described. Therefore, for example, when 1⁄4 is selected as the winning probability of the success / failure determination processing, the above integration result has a predetermined value when 1⁄5 or 2⁄5 is selected as the winning probability of the distribution determination processing. The following is the case, and when 3/5, 4/5 or 1/1 is selected as the winning probability of the distribution determination process, the above integration result does not fall below the predetermined value.

  If the combined probability of the integration results is not equal to or less than the predetermined value (step S2604: NO), probability correction processing of distribution determination is executed (step S2605). In the probability correction process, a winning probability that is lower than the winning probability of the currently selected distribution determination process and is the second largest value is set as a selection target. Then, the processing of step S2603 and step S2604 is executed again for the winning probability, and the processing of step S2603 to step S2605 is repeated until the combined probability of the integration result becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value.

  When the combined probability of the integration result is equal to or less than the predetermined value (step S2604: YES), “1” is set to the flag of the main RAM 94 corresponding to the winning probability of the currently selected distribution determination process. The currently-selected winning probability is set as the winning probability of the distribution determination process (step S2606). After that, as in step S2203 and step S2207 of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 37) in the fourth embodiment, the first high frequency support flag of the main RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2607). As a result, the support mode of the guidance unit 52 becomes the high frequency support mode. Further, a state transition command is transmitted to the sound side MPU 103 (step S2608). As a result, the winning probability of the success / failure determination process selected this time in the display light emitting unit 73, the speaker unit 74, and the symbol display device 44 and the winning probability of the distribution determination process are notified.

  When it is not a high probability hitting result of the distribution determination processing (step S2601: NO), a setting processing of the initial probability of the distribution determination is executed (step S2609). In the setting process, the flag of the main RAM 94 so that the winning probability of the sorting determination processing is 1/5 which is the lowest winning probability in the selection target winning probability that can be selected when the high probability winning result is obtained. Execute the setting process of

  After that, similarly to step S2210 of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 37) in the fourth embodiment, the second high frequency support flag of the main RAM 94 is set to “1” and the end reference counter of the main RAM 94. "100" is set (step S2610). As a result, the high frequency support mode is set with the upper limit of 100 game runs. Also, a low probability transition command is sent to the sound side MPU 103 (step S2611). As a result, in the display light emitting unit 73, the speaker unit 74 and the symbol display device 44, it is informed that both the winning probability of the success / failure determination processing and the winning probability of the distribution determination processing are the lowest probability.

  According to the present embodiment described above, the change in the probability that the winning result is selected in the success or failure determination process is the distribution execution mode when the game round that results in the success or failure is ended in the success or failure determination process. It can be executed irrespective of the presence or absence of the execution and the presence or absence of the occurrence of the V prize. On the other hand, in the distribution determination processing, the change of the probability of winning in the transition to the distribution execution mode may be executed when the open / close execution mode generated due to the V winning is finished. That is, a situation in which the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process fluctuates and a situation in which the probability that the transition to the distribution execution mode will be won in the distribution determination process fluctuate separately occur. This makes it possible to diversify the setting manner of each probability.

  Further, when the combined probability obtained by integrating the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination processing and the probability that the transition to the distribution execution mode will be won in the distribution determination processing is greater than a predetermined value, the combined probability is The probability that the winning result is selected in the qualification process or the probability of winning in the shift to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process is corrected so as to be equal to or less than the predetermined value. As a result, the situation in which the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process fluctuates and the situation in which the probability that the transition to the distribution execution mode will be won in the distribution judgment process fluctuates occur separately. Also, it is possible to keep their combined probability within a predetermined probability range.

Seventh Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the first gaming state transition processing and the second gaming state transition processing is different from that of the sixth embodiment. The different configurations will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the sixth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing the first gaming state transition processing in the present embodiment. Note that the first gaming state transition processing is executed in step S2408 of the special figure determination processing (FIG. 41) in the sixth embodiment.

  First, it is determined whether the value of the high probability continuation number counter of the pass / fail determination provided in the main RAM 94 is “0” (step S 2701). In the present embodiment, unlike the sixth embodiment, the winning result is determined in the success or failure determination process, and when the high probability hit result is selected in the type determination process, the winning probability of the success or failure determination process becomes higher than the normal gaming state. The situation continues until the first game state transition processing occurs thereafter for a predetermined number of continuations. One, two, and three times are set as the number of continuations, and which number of continuations is to be made is determined by lottery. Even in the situation where the number of continuations is one or more, even if the low probability winning result is selected by the type determination processing, the winning probability of the success / failure determination processing is not set to the winning probability corresponding to the low probability hitting result. The high probability continuation number counter of the pass / fail determination is a counter for specifying the number of continuations by the main MPU 92.

  If the value of the high probability continuation number counter of the judgment of success or failure is “0” (step S 2701: YES), the condition that the high probability winning result is selected in the type determination process in the current game run is the condition (step S 2702: YES), and executes the lottery process of the number of continuations of the determination of the qualification (step S2703). As described above, once, twice, and three times are set as the number of continuations of the situation where the winning probability of the success / failure determination process is higher than that of the normal gaming state. In the number-of-continuities determination process for the pass / fail judgment, the lottery table corresponding to the lottery process is read from the main ROM 93, and numerical information is acquired from the periodically updated lottery counter in the main RAM 94, and the acquired numerical information By checking the lottery table, the number of continuations of the pass / fail judgment is selected from one time, two times and three times. Then, the number of continuations of the selected pass / fail judgment is set in the high / low continuation count counter of the pass / fail judgment (step S2704).

  After that, a probability lottery process of success or failure judgment is executed (step S2705). In the probability lottery process of the success or failure determination, as in step S2302 of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 39) in the fifth embodiment, 1⁄4, 1⁄5 set as the selection object selection probability of the success or failure determination process. And one winning probability is selected from 1/8, 1/10 and 1/20. The selection target winning probability is higher than the winning probability set when the low probability winning result is obtained.

  After that, the product of the winning probability of the success / failure determination process selected in step S2705 and the current winning probability of the distribution determination process is calculated (step S2706). Then, it is determined whether the combined probability of the integration result is less than or equal to a predetermined value (step S2707). The predetermined value is set to 1/10. Therefore, for example, when 1/1 is selected as the selection probability of the distribution determination processing, the integration result is a predetermined value when 1/10 or 1/20 is selected as the selection probability of the qualification determination processing. The following is the case, and in the case where 1⁄4, 1⁄5 or 1⁄8 is selected as the winning probability of the success / failure determination process, the above integration result does not fall below the predetermined value.

  If the combined probability of the integration result is not equal to or less than the predetermined value (step S2707: NO), the probability correction process of the determination of success or failure is executed (step S2708). In the probability correction process, a winning probability that is lower than the winning probability of the currently selected success / failure determination process and is the second largest value is set as a selection target. Then, the processing of step S2706 and step S2707 is executed again for the winning probability, and the processing of step S2706 to step S2708 is repeated until the combined probability of the integration result becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value. When the combined probability of the integration result is equal to or less than the predetermined value (step S2707: YES), the current state is set by setting the flag of the main RAM 94 corresponding to the winning probability of the currently selected success / failure determination process to "1". The selected winning probability is set as the winning probability of the success or failure determination process (step S2709).

  If the value of the high probability continuation number counter of the yes or no determination is not “0” (step S 2701: NO), the value of the high probability continuation number counter of the yes or no determination is decremented by 1 (step S 2710). Then, when the value of the high probability continuation number counter after the one subtraction is not “0” (step S2711: NO), the processing of step S2705 to step S2709 described above is executed. Thus, in the situation where the number of continuations is one or more, the winning probability of the success / failure determination process is not fixed, but each time the winning result is obtained in the success / failure determination process, the success probability is higher than the normal gaming state. The winning probability of the determination process may vary.

  On the other hand, when the value of the high probability continuation number counter of the yes / no determination after 1 subtraction is “0” (step S2711: YES), the setting process of the initial probability of the yes or no determination is executed (step S2712). In the setting process, the main RAM 94 is selected so that the winning probability of the success / failure judging process is 1/40, which is a winning probability lower than all the selection target winning probabilities that can be selected when the high probability winning result is obtained. Execute flag setting processing.

  FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing the second gaming state transition processing in the present embodiment. The second gaming state transition process is executed instead of the gaming state transition process at step S1702 in the special power termination process (FIG. 28).

  First, it is determined whether the value of the high probability continuation number counter of the distribution determination provided in the main RAM 94 is “0” (step S 2801). In this embodiment, unlike the sixth embodiment, when the winning determination is made in the distribution determination process and the high probability hit result is selected, the winning probability of the distribution determination process is higher than that in the normal gaming state. However, the second game state transition processing continues thereafter until a predetermined number of continuations occur. The number of continuations is set once, twice, three times, four times and five times, and it is determined by lottery whether the number of continuations is to be made. Even if the low probability winning result is selected by the distribution determination processing in a situation where the number of continuations is one or more, the winning probability of the distribution determination processing is not set to the winning probability corresponding to the low probability winning result. The high probability continuation number counter of the distribution determination is a counter for specifying the number of continuations by the main MPU 92.

  If the value of the high probability continuation number counter of the distribution determination is “0” (step S 2801: YES), it is determined that the high probability hit result is selected in the current distribution determination process (step S 2802: YES) And distribution determination continuation number lottery processing is executed (step S2803). As described above, once, twice, three times, four times, and five times are set as the number of continuations of the situation where the winning probability of the distribution determination process is higher than that of the normal gaming state. In the distribution determination continuation number lottery process, the lottery table corresponding to the lottery process is read from the main ROM 93, and numerical information is acquired from the regularly updated lottery counter in the main RAM 94, and the acquired numerical information Is compared with the lottery table, and the number of continuations of the distribution determination is selected from one, two, three, four and five. Then, the number of continuations of the selected distribution determination is set in the high probability continuation number counter of the distribution determination (step S2804).

  Thereafter, probability determination processing of distribution determination is executed (step S2805). In the distribution process probability lottery process, as in step S2304 of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 39) in the fifth embodiment, 1/5, 2 set as the selection object selection probability of the distribution process. Select one winning probability from / 5, 3/5, 4/5 and 1/1.

  After that, the product of the current selection probability of the success / failure determination processing and the selection probability of the distribution determination processing selected in step S2805 is calculated (step S2806). Then, it is determined whether the combined probability of the integration result is equal to or less than a predetermined value (step S2807). The predetermined value is set to 1/10 as already described. Therefore, for example, when 1⁄4 is selected as the winning probability of the success / failure determination processing, the combined probability of the above integration results when 1⁄5 or 2⁄5 is selected as the winning probability of the distribution determination processing Is less than or equal to a predetermined value, and when 3/5, 4/5, or 1/1 is selected as the winning probability of the distribution determination process, the combined probability of the integration results does not become less than or equal to the predetermined value.

  If the combined probability of the integration result is not equal to or less than the predetermined value (step S2807: NO), probability correction processing of distribution determination is executed (step S2808). In the probability correction process, a winning probability that is lower than the winning probability of the currently selected distribution determination process and is the second largest value is set as a selection target. Then, the processing of step S2806 and step S2808 is executed again for the winning probability, and the processing of step S2806 to step S2808 is repeated until the combined probability of the integration result becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value.

  If the combined probability of the integration result is equal to or less than the predetermined value (step S2807: YES), “1” is set in the flag of the main RAM 94 corresponding to the winning probability of the currently selected distribution determination process. The currently-selected winning probability is set as the winning probability of the distribution determination process (step S2809).

  If the value of the high probability continuation number counter of the distribution determination is not “0” (step S 2801: NO), the value of the high probability continuation number counter of the distribution determination is decremented by 1 (step S 2810). When the value of the high probability continuation number counter after the one subtraction is not “0” (step S2811: NO), the processing of step S2805 to step S2809 described above is executed. Thus, in the situation where the number of continuations is one or more, the winning probability of the sorting determination processing is not fixed, but the winning probability of the sorting determination processing may fluctuate every time the transition to the open / close execution mode occurs. It will be.

  On the other hand, when the value of the high probability continuation count counter of the distribution determination after 1 subtraction is “0” (step S2811: YES), setting processing of the initial probability of the distribution determination is executed (step S2812). In the setting process, the flag of the main RAM 94 so that the winning probability of the sorting determination processing is 1/5 which is the lowest winning probability in the selection target winning probability that can be selected when the high probability winning result is obtained. Execute the setting process of

  According to the present embodiment described above, when the probability that the winning result is selected in the success or failure determination process is higher than that at the low probability, the condition is generated in the success or failure determination process for the number of continuation results. Continue until This makes it possible to enhance the benefit of generating a high probability hit result of the pass / fail judgment process. Further, there are a plurality of types of the number of continuations, and the number of continuations is selected by lottery. As a result, it is possible to diversify the mode in which the situation in which the probability that the hit result is selected in the success / failure determination process is higher than that at the low probability time continues.

  Even in a situation where the probability that the hit result is selected in the success or failure determination process is higher than that at the low probability time, the probability may fluctuate. This makes it possible to diversify the setting manner of the probability.

  In the distribution determination process, when the probability that the transition to the distribution execution mode will be won is higher than the low probability, the condition continues until the open / close execution mode is generated for the number of continuation times. Thereby, it is possible to enhance the benefit of the generation of a high probability of the distribution determination process. Further, there are a plurality of types of the number of continuations, and the number of continuations is selected by lottery. As a result, it becomes possible to diversify an aspect in which the condition in which the probability that the transition to the distribution execution mode will be won in the distribution determination processing is higher than the low probability is continued.

  Even in a situation where the probability that the transition to the distribution execution mode will be won in the distribution determination process may be higher than the low probability, the probability may fluctuate. This makes it possible to diversify the setting manner of the probability.

  The number of continuations of the determination process and the number of continuations of the distribution determination process are individually determined, and the types of the number of continuations that can be selected are also different. This makes it possible to diversify the setting manner of each probability.

  Further, when the combined probability obtained by integrating the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination processing and the probability that the transition to the distribution execution mode will be won in the distribution determination processing is greater than a predetermined value, the combined probability is The probability that the winning result is selected in the qualification process or the probability of winning in the shift to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process is corrected so as to be equal to or less than the predetermined value. As a result, even if the configuration is such that the number of continuations for the success / failure determination process and the number of continuations for the distribution determination process are individually determined and the types of the number of continuations that can be selected are different. It is possible to keep the combined probability of V within a predetermined probability range.

Eighth Embodiment
In the above embodiments, when the game ball is detected by the V prize detection sensor 69 of the distribution winning device 36, the transition to the open / close execution mode is reliably generated, but in the present embodiment, the V prize detection sensor Even if the gaming ball is detected at 69, it may happen that the transition to the open / close execution mode does not occur. Further, in the present embodiment, as in the fourth embodiment, even if the winning of the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs during the winning period of the distribution through winning portion 35, the mode is switched to the distribution execution mode. It may happen that no migration occurs. In addition, when a prize for the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs, the probability that the transition to the distribution execution mode will be won is varied according to the gaming state. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the fourth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the fourth embodiment is basically omitted.

  First, types of hit results in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram for explaining types of hit results in the present embodiment. The winning result is selected in the type determination process (step S405) in the main MPU 92 as the winning result is obtained in the success / failure determination process (step S403) in the main MPU 92, as in the first embodiment. Although there are multiple types of hit results common to start of winning effective period of distribution through winning portion 35, winning probability of success determination processing, winning probability of distribution determination processing and V prize winning When there is an occurrence of V, the types of combinations of winning probabilities in the V winning lottery process to be executed are triggered to be changed to different types. However, even if the type of hit result is selected in the type determination process, the selected hit result is handled unless the transition to the open / close execution mode occurs with the game cycle in which the type determination process is executed. The setting of each winning probability is not performed.

  As the distribution destination of the winning result, as in the fourth embodiment, the low probability hitting result, the first high probability hitting result, the second high probability hitting result, the third high probability hitting result, and the third high probability hitting result There are 4 high probability hit results and 5 th high probability hit results. When the low probability hit result is obtained, the winning probability of the success / failure determination processing is 1/20, the winning probability of the distribution determination processing is 1/5, and the winning probability of the V prize lottery processing is 1/4. In this case, the combined probability value obtained by integrating these winning probabilities is 1/400. When it becomes the first high probability winning result, the winning probability of the qualification process is 1/4, the winning probability of the sorting process is 1/5, and the winning probability of the V prize lottery process is 1/2. Become. In this case, the value of the combined probability obtained by integrating these winning probabilities is 1/40. If the second high probability hit result, the winning probability of the success or failure judgment processing will be 1/8, the winning probability of the distribution judgment processing will be 2/5, the winning probability of the V winning lottery processing is 1/2 Become. In this case, the value of the combined probability obtained by integrating these winning probabilities is 1/40. If the third high probability hit result, the winning probability of the qualification process will be 1/10, the winning probability of the sorting process will be 2/5, and the winning probability of the V winning lottery process will be 1/3 Become. In this case, the combined probability value obtained by integrating these winning probabilities is 1/65. When it becomes the 4th high probability winning result, the winning probability of the success or failure judgment processing will be 1/20, the winning probability of the distribution judgment processing will be 4/5, and the winning probability of the V prize lottery processing will be 1/3. Become. In this case, the combined probability value obtained by integrating these winning probabilities is 1/65. In the case of the fifth high probability winning result, the winning probability of the success or failure judging process is 1/40 which is a lower probability than the case of the low probability hitting result, and the winning probability of the distribution judging process is 1/1. The winning probability of the V prize lottery process is 1/1. In this case, the value of the combined probability obtained by integrating these winning probabilities is 1/40.

  The probability that the first distribution execution mode is selected in the distribution determination process is constant at 1/2 of the winning result in the distribution determination process even if any winning result is selected. It has become.

  FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing distribution processing in the present embodiment. The distribution process is executed in step S310 in the special figure electric power control process (FIG. 14).

  In the distribution process, when the V winning detection sensor 69 detects a game ball (step S2901: YES), the V winning lottery process is executed (step S2902). In the V prize lottery process, the lottery table for the V prize corresponding to the current lottery state is read from the main ROM 93, and the numerical information of the lottery counter periodically updated in the main RAM 94 is read, and the read numerical information Is compared with the lottery table for the V prize read out above. If the result of the V prize drawing process is V prize winning (step S2903: YES), "1" is set in the V prize flag of the main RAM 94 (step S2904). As a result, as in the first embodiment, when the current distribution execution mode ends, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode. Also, in step S2905, the V winning command is transmitted to the sound side MPU 103.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2901, a negative determination is made in step S2903, or if the process of step S2905 is performed, other processes are performed (step S2906). In the other processing, the processing of step S1201 to step S1205 and step S1209 to step S1222 of the distribution processing (FIG. 23) in the first embodiment is executed.

  According to the present embodiment described above, when the success / failure determination process, the distribution determination process, and the V prize lottery process are executed in a mode corresponding to any high probability hit result, the low probability hit result is handled. The combination probability becomes higher than in the case where the success determination process, the distribution determination process, and the V prize lottery process are performed in a mode of performing. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of any high probability of being hit results.

  Depending on the type of the high probability winning result, the combination type of the winning probability of the success / failure determination processing, the winning probability of the distribution determination processing, and the winning probability of the V prize lottery processing is different. As a result, it becomes possible to diversify setting modes of the winning probability of the success / fail judgment processing, the winning probability of the distribution judgment processing and the winning probability of the V prize lottery processing, and along with that, it is possible to achieve diversification of the game. Become.

  The above combination probability differs depending on the type of high probability hit result. This makes it possible to bring about advantages and disadvantages even in high probability hit results. In addition, the combination probability becomes 1/40 or less which is the upper limit reference probability regardless of which high probability hit result is triggered. This makes it possible to prevent the degree of advantage from becoming excessively high.

  The fifth high probability winning result is that although the winning probability of the success / failure determination processing is lower than that of the low probability winning result, the winning probability of the distribution determination processing and the winning probability of the V prize lottery processing are 100%. In this case, if a winning result is obtained in the pass / fail judgment processing, if a winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs during the winning period of the distribution through winning portion 35, the transition to the distribution execution mode is made. When the V winning is generated in the distribution execution mode, the transition to the open / close execution mode occurs reliably. In this situation, the transition to the open / close execution mode will occur with high probability as long as the winning result is the success or failure judgment process, so the player's attention to the winning result in the success or failure judgment process is increased. It becomes possible.

Other Embodiments
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, A various deformation | transformation improvement is possible within the range which does not deviate from the meaning of this invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the configurations of the following different embodiments may be individually applied to the configurations of the above-described embodiments, or may be applied in combination. In addition, the configurations of the above-described embodiments may be combined with each other, and the following different configurations may be individually applied to the combined configurations, or may be applied in combination.

  (1) When a winning on the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs, a predetermined number of gaming balls may be paid out. The predetermined number may be one or two or more. In addition, when a prize for the distribution through winning portion 35 is generated, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out regardless of whether or not it is a prize effective period of the distribution through winning portion 35. The arrangement may be such that a predetermined number of game balls are paid out only when a winning on the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs in a period different from the distribution valid period of the distribution through winning portion 35. Good. In these cases, the benefit of the game ball being paid out is awarded for the occurrence of the winning on the distribution through winning portion 35 during a period different from the winning period of the distribution through winning portion 35. . Also, instead of the above configuration, the predetermined number of game balls may be paid out only when a prize for the distribution through prize portion 35 occurs in the prize effective period of the distribution through prize portion 35. Good. In this case, it is possible to increase the advantage of the winning period.

  (2) Instead of a configuration in which the distribution execution mode reliably occurs when a winning on the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs, a winning on the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs. If a lottery process (for example, 10% probability occurs) is selected to determine whether or not the minute execution mode is to be generated, the distribution execution mode It may be configured to occur. In this case, the winning combination valid period of the distribution through winning portion 35 may be continued until the distribution execution mode is generated, or even if the distribution execution mode is not generated, the distribution through winning portion 35 is When the number of winning combinations reaches a specific number (for example, 10) or when the number of occurrences of the lottery process reaches a specific number (for example, 10), the winning period of the distribution through winning portion 35 ends. It is also good.

  (3) In the first embodiment, in place of the configuration in which the variation display of the pattern in the distribution display unit 42c is started when the winning combination valid period of the distribution through winning portion 35 is started, the distribution through The variation display of symbols in the distribution display unit 42c is started at the timing when the winning of the distribution through winning unit 35 occurs or at the timing when the distribution execution mode is started in the winning period of the winning portion 35. It is also good.

  (4) In the second distribution execution mode, in place of the configuration in which the V prize is not generated, the V distribution is less likely to occur than in the first distribution execution mode even in the second distribution execution mode. It is good also as composition which a prize may occur. For example, while the release mode of the distribution winning combination device 36 is the same or substantially the same in the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode, the period during which the switching piece 66 is disposed at the V lead position is the first distribution. The second distribution execution mode may be configured to have a shorter period than the minute execution mode. Further, for example, in the second distribution execution mode, the switching piece 66 is disposed at the V-guiding position after the distribution winning device 36 is closed, but immediately before the distribution winning device 36 is closed. In the case of a gaming ball that has won a prize in the distribution winning device 36, it may be arranged to reach the position of the switching piece 66 after being arranged at the V-guided position. In these cases, even in the second distribution execution mode, the V prize can be generated in the regular game, so it is possible to increase the player's attention to the second distribution execution mode.

  In the configuration, the same open / close execution mode may be generated when the V prize is generated in the first distribution execution mode and when the V prize is generated in the second distribution execution mode. Further, instead of the above configuration, when the V winning in the second distribution execution mode occurs, the transition to the opening / closing execution mode more advantageous for the player than when the V prize occurs in the first distribution execution mode It is good also as composition. For example, in the second distribution execution mode, the number of times of execution of the round game in which the winning of the special power winning device 37 is possible is more than the case where the V winning occurs in the first distribution execution mode. By increasing the number, as a result, the number of occurrences of winnings on the special power winning device 37 in the open / close execution mode may be increased. Also, for example, if V winning occurs in the second distribution execution mode, the upper limit number of winnings to the special power winning device 37 in each round game is greater than when V winning occurs in the first distribution execution mode As a result, the number of game balls paid out in the open / close execution mode may be increased. In these cases, it is possible to increase the player's satisfaction with the occurrence of the V prize in the second distribution execution mode in which the expected degree of occurrence of the V prize is relatively low.

  (5) The configuration may be such that the open / close execution mode is not generated when the V winning is generated in the second distribution execution mode in each of the above embodiments.

  (6) If V prize winning occurs in the second distribution execution mode in each of the above embodiments, an external signal may be output from the pachinko machine 10 to the management computer of the game hall.

  (7) When the game ball is detected by the V prize detection sensor 69 in a situation not in the distribution execution mode, any one or a predetermined combination of the display light emitting portion 73, the speaker portion 74 and the symbol display device 44 is abnormal. The notification may be executed. In addition, when the game ball is detected by the V prize detection sensor 69 in a situation other than the distribution execution mode, an external signal may be output from the pachinko machine 10 to the management computer of the game hall.

  (8) In each of the above embodiments, the same open / close execution mode is generated when V winning occurs in the first distribution execution mode and when V winning occurs in the second distribution execution mode It may be This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the open / close execution mode.

  (9) The third distribution execution mode may be set in addition to the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode in the above embodiments. For example, while the release mode of the distribution winning combination device 36 is the same or substantially the same in the first distribution execution mode and the third distribution execution mode, the period during which the switching piece 66 is disposed at the V guiding position is the first distribution. The third distribution execution mode may be configured to have a shorter period than the minute execution mode. Also, for example, in the third distribution execution mode, the switching piece 66 is disposed at the V-guiding position after the distribution winning device 36 is closed, but immediately before the distribution winning device 36 is closed. In the case of a gaming ball that has won a prize in the distribution winning device 36, it may be arranged to reach the position of the switching piece 66 after being arranged at the V-guided position.

  (10) The configuration of the distribution winning device 36 is not limited to the configuration in each of the above embodiments. For example, a rolling portion in which a rolling area of gaming balls is formed is provided inside the distribution winning device 36 In addition, a plurality of drop holes for the game ball are provided in the rolling portion, and the game ball that has won the distribution winning device 36 falls into one of the drop holes after rolling in the rolling area. It is also good. When the gaming ball falls into the drop hole corresponding to the V prize, a transition to the open / close execution mode may be generated as the occurrence of the V prize. In this case, in the first distribution execution mode, the game balls are derived to the rolling area so that the game balls can fall into the drop holes corresponding to the V prize, whereas in the second distribution execution mode Alternatively, the game balls may be led out to the rolling area so that the game balls do not fall into the drop holes for V prize winning.

  (11) The special power winning device 37 may not be provided, and each round game may be performed by opening the distribution winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode.

  (12) Instead of a configuration in which the opening / closing execution mode is generated as a bonus when the V prize is generated in the distribution execution mode, a configuration may be adopted in which the acceptance lottery mode after the distribution execution mode becomes the high probability mode The support mode after the execution mode may be a high-frequency support mode, or a large number of game balls may be paid out.

  (13) Hold information (hereinafter referred to as "first hold information") acquired when winning in the first operation unit 32 occurs and hold information acquired when winning in the second operation unit 33 occurs ( Hereinafter, the second hold information may be stored separately. In this case, it may be configured that the player's degree of advantage is different when the acceptance determination process is executed between the first suspension information and the second suspension information. For example, the configuration in which the success or failure determination process is performed on the second hold information may be more advantageous to the player than in the case where the success or failure determination process is performed on the first hold information. Specifically, in the case where the pass / fail judgment processing is executed on the second hold information and the hit result is obtained, the pass / fail judgment processing is executed on the first hold information and the hit result is obtained. Also, the probability that the first distribution execution mode is selected in the distribution determination process may be increased.

  Further, in the configuration in which the first hold information and the second hold information are distinguished and stored as described above, the pass / fail judgment is made in the order acquired regardless of which is the first hold information or the second hold information. The configuration may be the execution target of the process, and the second hold information may be the execution target of the validity determination process prior to the first hold information regardless of the acquired order.

  (14) In the second distribution execution mode, the V winning may not be generated reliably because the switching piece 66 is not disposed at the V guiding position.

  (15) In each of the above embodiments, the open / close execution mode triggered by the occurrence of the V winning in the first distribution execution mode is triggered by the occurrence of the V win in the second distribution execution mode. Since the number of times of execution of the round game that can be awarded to the special power winning device 37 is larger than that in the opening / closing execution mode, the number of occurrences of winning to the special power winning device 37 in the opening / closing execution mode is consequently increased. It is good also as composition. Further, the open / close execution mode triggered by the occurrence of the V winning in the first distribution execution mode is more than the open / close execution mode triggered by the occurrence of the V win in the second distribution execution mode. By increasing the upper limit number of winning to the special power winning device 37 in each round game, as a result, it may be configured to increase the payout number of gaming balls in the opening / closing execution mode.

  (16) When the result of the success or failure judgment processing is a hit result, the winning combination term of the through winning portion 35 for distribution does not occur, but the distribution execution mode is generated, and V in the distribution execution mode When a prize is generated, the open / close execution mode may be generated. In this case, in the distribution execution mode, the game ball that has won the distribution winning device 36 may be configured to generate the V winning with a predetermined probability that is greater than 0% and less than 100%. In addition, instead of the configuration in which the distribution execution mode occurs when the result of the success or failure judgment processing results in a hit, when the game ball enters the first ball entry part, the ball enters the second ball entry part If the game ball enters the second ball entry section, the distribution execution mode may be generated, and if the V winning is generated in the distribution execution mode, the open / close execution mode may be generated. .

  (17) In the distribution execution mode, the induction unit 52 of the second operation unit 33 may not be in the driving state, and in the second distribution execution mode, the induction unit 52 may be in the driving state. In the distribution execution mode, the induction unit 52 may not be driven. In the first distribution execution mode, the induction unit 52 may be driven, but in the second distribution execution mode, the induction unit 52 may be driven. May not be driven. Further, the induction unit 52 of the second operation unit 33 may not be in the driving state in the opening / closing execution mode, and the induction unit 52 may be in the driving state in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode. On the other hand, in the open / close execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode, the induction unit 52 may not be driven. In the open / close execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode, the induction unit 52 may The induction unit 52 may be configured not to be in the drive state in the open / close execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode, although it may be in the drive state.

  (18) The distribution through winning portion 35 may be provided below the second operation portion 33. In this case, the induction unit 52 of the second operating unit 33 is not in the driving state in the winning effective period of the distribution through winning portion 35, and the induction of the second operating portion 33 is in a period different from the winning effective period. The unit 52 may be in a driving state.

  (19) If the open / close execution mode does not occur even if the result of the success / failure determination process and the distribution determination process results in high probability, the success / failure lottery mode after the end of the distribution execution mode is set to the low probability mode It may be configured as In this case, the support mode may be set to the low frequency support mode, or may be set to the high frequency support mode that continues until the hit result occurs next time, and the end reference frequency (for example, 100 times) It may be configured to be set to a high frequency support mode which continues until the game times are consumed.

  Also, even if the result of the pass / fail judgment processing and the distribution judgment processing results in a low probability hit, if the open / close execution mode does not occur, the support mode after the end of the distribution execution mode is set to the low frequency support mode The configuration may be

  (20) When the distribution execution mode is entered, detection of the gaming ball in the V prize detection sensor 69 may be reliably generated regardless of the type. For example, the passage through which the game ball that has won the distribution winning device 36 passes is not divided by the discharge passage region 65b and the V winning passage region 65c, but includes only the V winning passage region 65c. The game ball that has won the apparatus 36 may be configured to be surely detected by the V prize detection sensor 69 by passing through the V prize passage area 65 c. Further, instead of the above configuration, the passage through which the game ball that has won the distribution winning device 36 passes is branched into the discharge passage area 65b and the V prize passage area 65c as in the above embodiments. Even if it is in the distribution execution mode, at least one of the gaming balls that have won in the distribution winning device 36 passes through the V prize passage area 65 c and is reliably switched by the V prize detection sensor 69. Alternatively, drive control may be performed.

  (21) Instead of a configuration in which the open / close execution mode is reliably generated when the game ball that has won in the distribution winning device 36 is detected by the V prize detection sensor 69 in the distribution execution mode, the V prize detection sensor 69 The open / close execution mode may be generated with a predetermined probability (probability greater than 0% and less than 100%) when the game ball is detected. For example, the main MPU 92 may execute a lottery process when a game ball is detected by the V prize detection sensor 69, and the opening / closing execution mode may be generated when an occurrence is won in the lottery process. . As a result, the player is expected not only to generate a V winning, but also to expect to be a generation winning in the lottery process.

  (22) The display control is performed based on the command output from the main control device 81 instead of the configuration in which the display control device 111 is controlled by the sound emission control device 101 based on the command output from the main control device 81 The device 111 may be configured to control the sound emission control device 101. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 101 and the display control device 111 are separately provided, both control devices may be provided as one control device, and one function of the both control devices may be provided. May be integrated into the main control device 81, and both functions of both control devices may be integrated into the main control device 81. Further, the configuration of the command output from the main control device 81 to the sound emission control device 101 and the configuration of the command output from the sound emission control device 101 to the display control device 111 are also arbitrary.

  (23) The device on which the effect for the game run is executed is not limited to the symbol display device 44, and the configuration for the effect for the game run is executed by operating the decorative member provided movable. It is good also as composition which an effect for game circulation is performed by making a predetermined light emission part turn on, and an effect of game circulation is performed by combination of all or a part of the above-mentioned each mode Good.

  (24) Other types of pachinko machines and the like different from the above embodiment, for example, pachinko machines in which a motorized role opens a predetermined number of times when gaming balls enter a specific area of a special device The present invention can be applied to a pachinko machine which becomes a jackpot upon entering and becomes a jackpot, a pachinko machine provided with other features, an arrange ball machine, a game machine such as a ball ball, and the like.

  A non-ball-ball type game machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of kinds of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts the rotation of the reels by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on an effective line visible from the display window after the reel is stopped by the passage of a predetermined time, a bonus such as payout of medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body supported in an openable and closable manner by the outer frame is provided with the storage section and the loading device, and the start lever is operated after the predetermined number of gaming balls stored in the storage section are loaded by the loading device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated by starting to rotate the reels.

  In addition, the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine in which gaming balls are cyclically used without being discharged to the island facility. In addition, the player can not replenish the gaming balls to the pachinko machine, the number of gaming balls available to the player is managed as data, and the firing operation is performed under the situation where the number of available gaming balls is one or more. The present invention may be applied to a configuration in which when the game ball is fired, the number of usable game balls is subtracted. In this case, if the winning through occurs to the distribution through winning portion 35, the distribution winning device 36 or the special power winning device 37 etc. and a winning ball is generated, the number of usable gaming balls increases on the data. It becomes.

  (25) In each of the above embodiments, the distribution execution mode may be configured to include only the first distribution execution mode. In this case, when the distribution execution mode is generated, aiming at a winning on the distribution winning device 36 and continuing the firing of the gaming balls causes the V winning to occur. When the configuration is applied to the fourth to eighth embodiments, the first distribution execution mode is surely generated when the shift to the distribution execution mode is won in the distribution determination process.

  (26) In the fourth to eighth embodiments described above, when a winning on the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs in the winning period to the distribution through winning portion 35, the mode is switched to the distribution execution mode. Although the transition certainly occurs, the distribution probability between the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode may be varied according to the gaming state. For example, in the case of the fourth embodiment and the eighth embodiment described above, the first distribution is more likely to occur when the first to fifth high probability hitting results are met than the low probability hitting results. The distribution probability to the execution mode may be increased, and the distribution probability to the first distribution execution mode may be different in each of the first to fifth high probability hitting results. Further, for example, in the fifth embodiment to the seventh embodiment, the distribution probability to the first distribution execution mode is varied in the probability lottery processing of the distribution determination, and At least one of the probability is corrected so that the combined probability obtained by integrating the probability that the hit result is selected and the probability that the first distribution execution mode is selected in the distribution determination process becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value It is also good.

  (27) In the case where the probability of becoming a winning transition to the distribution execution mode is changed in the distribution determination processing triggered by the high probability hit result in the fourth embodiment to the seventh embodiment, It may be configured to be changed to a higher probability than the probability set in response to the low probability hit result. This makes it possible to enhance the advantage of having a high probability of winning.

  (28) In the case where the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process is changed triggered by the high probability hitting result in the fourth embodiment to the seventh embodiment, the low probability hitting result It is good also as composition which may be changed into a probability lower than the probability concerned set up triggered by becoming. However, in order to secure the advantage of the high probability hit result, in this case, the probability that the hit result is selected in the pass / fail judgment processing and the transition winning to the distribution execution mode in the distribution judgment processing Transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process so that the combined probability obtained by integrating the probability and the probability becomes higher than the combined probability of each probability set with the low probability hit result. Preferably, the probability of winning will be set.

  (29) In the fifth embodiment to the seventh embodiment, the probability that the winning result is selected in the qualification determination process and the probability that the transition determination mode will be won in the distribution execution mode are selected. At least one of the probability that the winning result is selected in the qualification determination process and the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process are corrected such that the integrated combination probability becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value In the configuration, in addition to or instead of this, the probability to be selected in the qualification process so that the combined probability becomes a specific value or more, and the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process At least one of the probabilities of winning may be modified. This makes it possible to prevent the combination probability from becoming lower than expected.

  (30) In the fifth embodiment to the seventh embodiment, the probability that the winning result is selected in the qualification determination process and the probability that the transition determination mode will be won in the distribution execution mode is high. In the case where it is set higher than the low probability due to the chance hit result, the probability may be corrected such that the combined probability obtained by integrating the probabilities is always a predetermined probability. For example, in the case of the fifth embodiment, in the probability determination process of distribution determination (step S2307), the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process is such that the combination probability becomes a predetermined probability. It is corrected.

  Further, for example, in the case of the sixth embodiment and the seventh embodiment, the probability that the winning result is selected in the qualification determination processing and the probability that the transition to the distribution execution mode will be won in the distribution determination processing. In the situation where one of them is set to the probability at the time of low probability, the situation where the other is set to the probability triggered by the high probability winning result may occur. In such a case, the other probability is set such that the combined probability becomes a predetermined probability while keeping one of the probabilities set as the low probability. As a result, when a high probability hit result is generated for at least one of the success / failure determination process and the distribution determination process, the combined probability becomes the predetermined probability.

  Further, for example, in the seventh embodiment, one of the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination processing and the probability that the transition to the distribution execution mode will be won in the distribution determination processing is first. While the number of continuations is “0” and is set to the probability at low probability, there may occur a situation where the number of continuations is one or more and the probability at high probability is held. In such a case, when the number of continuations is “0” and the probability of being set to a low probability, the probability that the number of continuations is 1 or more is higher than that so that the combined probability becomes a predetermined probability. Will be changed to a high probability. This diversifies the opportunity to change the probability.

  (31) In the fourth embodiment to the eighth embodiment, the probability that the winning result is selected in the qualification process may be notified as it is, and the selection probability of the notification mode according to the probability May be different from each other, may be a configuration in which the probability is not notified at all, or may be a configuration in which notification indicating whether the probability is equal to or more than a predetermined probability is performed.

  (32) In the fourth embodiment to the eighth embodiment, the probability that the shift to the distribution execution mode will be won in the distribution determination process may be notified as it is, according to the probability The selection probability of the notification mode may be different, the probability may not be notified at all, or the notification indicating whether the probability is equal to or more than a predetermined probability may be executed.

  (33) In the eighth embodiment, the probability of winning a V prize in the V winning lottery process may be notified as it is, and the selection probability of the notification mode is different according to the probability. Alternatively, the probability may not be notified at all, or the notification indicating whether the probability is equal to or more than the predetermined probability may be executed.

  (34) In the fourth embodiment, the game state transition process (FIG. 37) is not executed unless the open / close execution mode shifted due to the occurrence of the V prize is ended. Instead of this, the V prize is replaced Even if no transition occurs to the distribution execution mode, the game state transition process (FIG. 37) may be executed, and the transition to the distribution execution mode may not occur. The game state transition process (FIG. 37) may be executed when the game cycle resulting in the hit result in the success or failure judgment process is ended. As a result, it is possible to generate many opportunities for changing the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination processing and the probability that the transition to the distribution execution mode will be won in the distribution determination processing.

  (35) In the gaming state transition process (FIG. 39) in the fifth embodiment, the probability lottery process of distribution determination may be executed prior to the probability lottery process of success or failure determination. In this case, if the combined probability obtained by integrating the probability that the winning result is selected in the qualification determination process and the probability that the transition to the distribution execution mode will be won in the distribution determination processing is greater than a predetermined value The probability that the hit result will be selected in the process will be corrected.

  (36) An embodiment other than the seventh embodiment configured such that the situation in which the probability higher than the low probability is set or can be set as in the seventh embodiment continues for the number of continuations. It may apply to

  (37) In the seventh embodiment, when the probability is set and the number of continuations is set in response to the high probability hit result being set, the set probability is the value of the number of continuations being “0”. It is good also as composition held until it becomes. This makes it easy for the player to understand the setting situation of the probability.

  (38) In the eighth embodiment, the probability that the hit result is selected in the success or failure determination process may not change. In this case, the probability that the shift to the distribution execution mode will be won in the distribution determination process and the probability that the V winning will be won in the V prize lottery process will fluctuate. A configuration may be applied to the configuration in which correction processing of probability is performed such that the combined probability is equal to or less than a predetermined value as in the fifth embodiment, as in the sixth embodiment. A configuration may be applied in which the timing at which each probability is changed is different, and as in the seventh embodiment, a configuration in which the probability becomes higher or higher than that at low probability continues over the number of continuations. It may apply.

  (39) In the eighth embodiment described above, the probability of becoming a winning transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination processing may not be varied. In this case, the probability that the winning result is selected in the qualification determination process and the probability that the V prize will be won in the V prize lottery process fluctuate. A configuration may be applied to the configuration in which correction processing of probability is performed such that the combined probability is equal to or less than a predetermined value as in the fifth embodiment, as in the sixth embodiment. A configuration may be applied in which the timing at which each probability is changed is different, and as in the seventh embodiment, a configuration in which the probability becomes higher or higher than that at low probability continues over the number of continuations. It may apply.

  (40) The probability that the winning result will be hit is higher than that at the low probability, compared to the configuration in which the open / close execution mode is generated reliably when the game result which has been hit in the hit determination processing is over A configuration may be applied in which the situation continues until a predetermined number of open / close execution modes are generated and a plurality of predetermined numbers exist. In this case, the suspension information acquired based on the winning of the first operating unit 32 and the suspension information acquired based on the winning of the second operating unit 33 are stored separately, and which is the suspension information? The selection ratio of the predetermined number of times, the number of types of the predetermined number of times, and the selection expectation value of the predetermined number of times may be different according to the above. As a result, it becomes possible to make the selection mode of the predetermined number of times different depending on the type of the operating unit 32, 33 which has triggered the acquisition of the hold information, and diversification of the game is achieved.

  (41) There are three or more types of probability of winning results in the success / failure determination process with respect to the configuration in which the open / close execution mode is generated reliably when the game results that are hit results in the success / failure determination process end. The configuration may be applied.

<About the invention group extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiment will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configuration in the above embodiment is appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configuration illustrated in the parentheses or the like.

<Feature A group>
Features A1. Variable ball entry means (sorting winning device 36) capable of switching between the open state and the closed state;
Variable ball entering control means for performing variable ball entering control to switch to the closed state after the variable ball entering means is brought into the open state (function to execute the process for starting distribution and the process for distributing in the main side MPU 92) ,
State setting means (a function for executing the process of waiting for distribution in the main MPU 92) to be set to a state (distribution execution mode) in which the variable ball entry control is executed;
A bonus (transition to the open / close execution mode) is awarded to the player based on the generation of the benefit award trigger (detection of the game ball by the V prize detection sensor 69) by the game ball having entered the variable ball entry means Privilege giving means (function of executing the processing of step S1311 in the main MPU 92);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature A1, even if the game ball enters the variable ball entry means, the player can not receive the bonus unless the bonus ball is generated by the gaming ball. Thus, when variable entering control of the variable entering means is executed, the player not only enters the game ball into the variable entering means but also enters the game into the variable entering means. It is expected that the opportunity to grant benefits will be generated by the ball. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation becomes gradual, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature A2. Variable ball entry means (sorting winning device 36) capable of switching between the open state and the closed state;
Variable ball entering control means for performing variable ball entering control to switch to the closed state after the variable ball entering means is brought into the open state (function to execute the process for starting distribution and the process for distributing in the main side MPU 92) ,
A bonus (transition to the open / close execution mode) is awarded to the player based on the generation of the benefit award trigger (detection of the game ball by the V prize detection sensor 69) by the game ball having entered the variable ball entry means Privilege giving means (function of executing the processing of step S1311 in the main MPU 92);
Predetermined lottery means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the occurrence of a predetermined lottery trigger (winning of the through winning portion 35 for distribution) (in the first embodiment, the processing of step S1003 and step S1004 in the main MPU 92) Function in the third embodiment, that is, the function of executing the processing of step S1802 and step S1803 in the main MPU 92);
First state setting means (a function of executing the processing of step S1104 and step S1105 in the main MPU 92) that sets the state in which the variable ball entry control is performed when the result of the predetermined lottery process is a specific result;
And second state setting means (function to execute the processing of step S1106 and step S1107 in the main side MPU 92) to set the state in which the variable ball entry control is executed when the result of the predetermined lottery process is a nonspecific result. ,
Equipped with
When the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes the specific result, the privilege giving trigger may occur, or when the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes the specific result, the result of the predetermined lottery process is the above A gaming machine characterized in that the benefit giving opportunity is more likely to occur than when a non-specified result is obtained.

  According to the feature A2, even if the game ball enters the variable ball entry means, the player can not receive the bonus unless the bonus ball is generated by the gaming ball. Thus, when variable entering control of the variable entering means is executed, the player not only enters the game ball into the variable entering means but also enters the game into the variable entering means. It is expected that the opportunity to grant benefits will be generated by the ball. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation becomes gradual, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, a benefit giving opportunity is more likely to occur when the result of the predetermined lottery process executed based on the occurrence of the predetermined lottery opportunity becomes the specified result than when the non-specified result is obtained. As a result, the player not only expects the variable ball entry control of the variable ball entry means to be executed, but also expects that the result of the predetermined lottery process will be the specified result. Therefore, the number of targets expected by the player increases, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Furthermore, variable entry control of the variable entry means is executed not only when the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes a specified result, but also when the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes a non-specified result. Thereby, when a predetermined lottery trigger occurs, variable entering control of the variable entering means is executed regardless of the result of the predetermined lottery process. Therefore, it becomes possible to provide many opportunities for the variable entry control of the variable entry means to be executed, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature A3. Based on the occurrence of the benefit awarding occasion, as the awarding of the privilege, the variable entering means or the different entering means (special power winning device 37) different therefrom is opened thereafter. The gaming machine described in A2.

  According to the feature A3, separately from the variable ball entry control of the variable ball entry means with respect to the occurrence of the predetermined lottery trigger, the variable ball entry means or the variable ball entry means different therefrom is opened, when the bonus award trigger occurs. It becomes a state. This makes it possible to extend the situation in which the variable ball entry means is in the open state by generating a benefit giving opportunity.

  Feature A4. Means for giving the player an object to be given which is either the game ball or the usable game ball number information based on the game ball having entered the variable ball entering means (payout device 86, payout control device 87 A game machine according to feature A2 or A3 characterized by comprising

  According to the feature A4, since the number of game balls usable by the player is increased by the occurrence of the game ball entering the variable ball entry means, the variable ball entry control of the variable ball entry means is executed It is possible to increase the level of attention to the subject. And, having the configuration of the feature A2, when the predetermined lottery trigger occurs, the variable entering control of the variable entering means is executed even if the result of the predetermined lottery process is a non-specific result, the predetermined lottery process Even when the result of is a non-specified result, it is possible to prevent the degree of attention to the game from being extremely reduced.

Feature A5. In the state where the variable ball entering control is executed when the result of the predetermined lottery process is the specific result, the total period of the open state in the variable ball entering means is variable in relation to the firing cycle of the game ball. It is set to a period that enables the entry of a specific number of game balls into the entry means,
In the state where the variable ball entering control is executed when the result of the predetermined lottery process is the non-specific result, the total period of the open state in the variable ball entering means is related to the firing cycle of the game ball A game machine according to any one of features A2 to A4, characterized in that it is set in a period in which the ball entering of the specified number of game balls into the variable ball entering means is enabled.

  According to the feature A5, even if the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes a non-specific result, it is equivalent to the case where the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes a specific result in the state where the variable ball entry control of the variable ball entry means is executed. It is possible to make the variable ball entry means enter the number of game balls. This makes it possible to reduce the player's sense of disadvantage for the result of the predetermined lottery process becoming a non-specified result.

  Feature A6. When the result of the predetermined lottery process is the specified result, the variable entering control is executed, and when the result of the predetermined lottery process is the non-specified result, the variable entered ball control is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A2 to A5, wherein the expected number of gaming balls entering the variable entering means is different depending on the state.

  According to the feature A6, the result of the predetermined lottery process is the specific result in relation to the expected number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means in the state where the variable ball entry control of the variable ball entry means is executed It is possible to make a difference in the degree of advantage between the case and the non-specified result.

  Feature A7. The above-mentioned privilege granting means does not grant the above-mentioned privilege, when the above-mentioned privilege granting opportunity occurs, although the above-mentioned predetermined lottery processing is not performed, A game given in any 1 of the features A2 thru / or A6 characterized by the above-mentioned Machine.

  If a benefit giving opportunity occurs despite the fact that the predetermined lottery process has not been executed, there is a high possibility that the occurrence of the benefit giving opportunity is due to fraud. Under such circumstances, according to the feature A7, when the opportunity for awarding a benefit occurs despite the fact that the predetermined lottery process is not executed, the benefit is not given, and therefore, the privilege is not given for such injustice. It will be possible to

Feature A8. The predetermined lottery trigger occurs on the basis of the game ball entering the predetermined ball entering portion (the through winning portion 35 for distribution),
The predetermined lottery process is executed when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry portion during the predetermined effective period, and the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry portion during the period different from the predetermined effective period. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A2 to A7, wherein the predetermined lottery process is not executed.

  According to the feature A8, since the predetermined lottery trigger occurs on the basis of the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry part, the game ball is first caused to enter the predetermined ball entry part in order to generate the benefit giving opportunity. After that, it becomes necessary to make the game ball enter the variable ball entry means. As a result, the target for aiming the game ball to enter the ball changes in stages, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In this case, the predetermined lottery process is executed when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry in the predetermined effective period, and even if the game ball enters the predetermined ball in the period different from the predetermined effective period The lottery process is not executed. This makes it possible to limit the situation in which the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry section triggers the execution of the predetermined lottery process, and it is possible to set the execution frequency of the predetermined lottery process to an appropriate frequency.

  Feature A9. When the benefit giving opportunity occurs in a state where the variable ball entering control is executed triggered by the result of the predetermined lottery process becoming the non-specific result, and the result of the predetermined lottery process is the specific result Means for performing different notification as notification of the occurrence of the benefit provision trigger when the benefit provision trigger occurs in the state where the variable ball entry control triggered by the event is executed A game machine according to any one of features A2 to A8, comprising a display side MPU 113) and a function of executing the processing of step S1302 and step S1306 in the main side MPU 92.

  According to the feature A9, whether or not the benefit giving opportunity has occurred in the state where the variable ball entry control is being executed triggered by the non-specific result of the predetermined lottery process, or the result of the predetermined lottery process is the specified result It becomes possible to grasp clearly whether the privilege provision opportunity has occurred in the state where variable ball-in-place control is being executed triggered by the event.

  Feature A10. A game machine according to any one of features A2 to A9, comprising result notification means (sorting display unit 42c) for notifying information corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery process.

  According to the feature A10, it is possible to notify the content of the specific period determined by the predetermined lottery process.

Characteristics A11. First control means (main side MPU 92) having the privilege giving means, the predetermined lottery means, the first state setting means, and the second state setting means;
Second control means (sound light side MPU 103, display side MPU 113) that executes processing for controlling execution of the effect in the specific effect means based on the information transmitted by the first control means;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature A10, wherein the result notification means is controlled by the first control means.

  According to the feature A11, it is possible to increase the reliability of the information displayed on the result notification means.

Feature A12. When a specific lottery opportunity (a prize for the first operation unit 32 or the second actuation unit 33) occurs, a predetermined effective period (a prize effective period for the through winning portion for distribution 35) in which the predetermined lottery opportunity can occur Specific lottery means (function of executing the processing of step S301 and step S403 in the main side MPU 92) for executing a specific lottery process of determining whether to cause the generation;
The specific operation control means (the special operation display means 42a) is controlled to have the operation content corresponding to the lottery result of the specific lottery process when the specific unit operation is started and the particular unit operation is ended. A gaming machine according to feature A10 or A11, characterized in that the main MPU 92 is provided with a function of executing the processing of step S412, step S803 and step S804.

  According to the feature A12, the means for notifying that the specific lottery process has been executed and the lottery result of the specific lottery process, and the means for notifying the result of the predetermined lottery process are the specific operation means and the result notifying means Provided separately. Thus, it becomes possible to individually monitor each content by confirming the specific operation means and the result notification means.

  Feature A13. Specific unit effect is started when the specific lottery process is executed, and when the predetermined valid period is executed after that, the specific effect means (symbol) is continued so that the specific unit effect is continued in the predetermined valid period. A game machine according to feature A12, characterized by comprising means (display side MPU 113) for controlling the display device 44).

  According to the feature A13, by performing a series of effects before the start of the predetermined effective period and including the predetermined effective period by the specific effect unit, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect during these periods. Further, in the configuration in which a series of effects are executed before the start of the predetermined effective period and in the predetermined effective period as described above, the specific operation means and the result notification means are monitored to monitor each content. It becomes possible to do individually.

  Feature A14. The notification of the information corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery process in the result notification means is started when the state in which the variable ball entry control is performed is started, which is one of the features A10 to A13. The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the feature A14, it becomes possible to notify the lottery result of the predetermined lottery process at the start of the state in which the variable ball entry control is executed.

  Feature A15. Notification of information corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery process in the result notification means is continued in the state where the variable ball entry control is executed, the game according to any one of features A10 to A14 Machine.

  According to the feature A15, it becomes possible to grasp the lottery result of the predetermined lottery process by confirming the result notifying means at an arbitrary timing of the state in which the variable ball entry control is performed.

Feature A16. When a specific lottery opportunity (a prize for the first operation unit 32 or the second actuation unit 33) occurs, a predetermined effective period (a prize effective period for the through winning portion for distribution 35) in which the predetermined lottery opportunity can occur Specific lottery means (function of executing the processing of step S301 and step S403 in the main side MPU 92) for executing a specific lottery process of determining whether to cause the generation;
Unit effect control means (display side that causes specific unit effect to be started by the specific effect means (symbol display device 44) and makes the execution mode of the specific unit effect correspond to the lottery result of the specific lottery process after a predetermined period MPU 113),
Equipped with
The execution mode of the specific unit effect is an execution mode corresponding to the lottery result of the specific lottery process being a winning result, and the predetermined effective period occurs in a situation where the specific unit effect is continued. The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A15.

  According to the feature A16, it is possible to provide the effect corresponding to the lottery result of the specific lottery process by executing the specific unit effect in the execution mode corresponding to the lottery result of the specific lottery process. In this case, the specific unit effect is continued in the predetermined effective period even after the execution mode becomes an execution mode corresponding to the lottery result of the specific lottery process being a winning result. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the predetermined effective period is reached by using the specific unit effect which has been executed before the predetermined effective period is started.

  Feature A17. The gaming machine according to Feature A16, wherein the unit effect control means continues the specific unit effect even in a state in which the variable ball entry control is performed.

  According to the feature A17, the specific unit effect is executed including the state in which the variable ball entry control is performed, whereby the period before the predetermined valid period is started, the predetermined valid period, and the variable ball entry control are performed It is possible to provide a series of specific unit effects using the period of time taken.

  Feature A18. The gaming machine according to the feature A17, wherein the unit effect control means sets an execution mode of the specific unit effect to an occurrence of the bonus award opportunity when the bonus award opportunity is generated.

  According to the feature A18, the specific unit effect is performed by the execution mode of the specific unit effect corresponding to the occurrence of the benefit application opportunity when the benefit application opportunity occurs in the state where the variable ball entry control is executed. It is possible to notify of the occurrence of a benefit giving opportunity by using it.

  Features A19. The unit effect control means causes the variable display of the symbols to be displayed in a plurality of variable display areas as the specific unit effect, and the predetermined period has elapsed if the lottery result of the specific lottery process is a winning result. In the situation where a pattern of the same type is stopped and displayed in a part of the variable display areas in the plurality of variable display areas and the combination of reach patterns is formed, the variable display of the patterns is continued in the remaining variable display areas. In the game according to the feature A18, the same kind of pattern as the pattern forming the combination of the reach pattern is stopped and displayed in the remaining change display area when the bonus provision trigger occurs. Machine.

  According to the feature A19, it is possible to execute a series of effects using the fluctuation display of the pattern during the period before the predetermined effective period is started, the predetermined effective period, and the period when the variable entry control is performed. . In addition, when the predetermined effective period is started, the reach variation display is started, and when the bonus giving opportunity is generated, the combination of the same type of pattern is stopped and displayed, and each situation is displayed as the pattern variation. It is possible to notify using the aspect of.

Feature A20. The specific operation control means (the special operation display means 42a) is controlled to have the operation content corresponding to the lottery result of the specific lottery process when the specific unit operation is started and the particular unit operation is ended. A function of executing the processing of step S412, step S803 and step S804 in the main MPU 92),
In the case where the predetermined unit operation is started and the predetermined unit operation is ended, the predetermined operation means (vibration (D) predetermined operation control means for controlling the minute display portion 42c) (function of executing the processing of step S905, step S1001, step S1101, step S1201, step S1302 and step S1306 in the main MPU 92);
The gaming machine according to any one of features A16 to A19, comprising:

  According to the feature A20, the operation of the specific lottery process and the operation means for notifying the lottery result of the specific lottery process, the state where the variable ball entry control is executed, and the occurrence of the benefit giving opportunity Operation means for informing the user are separately provided as the specific operation means and the predetermined operation means. Thereby, in a configuration in which a series of effects are executed before the start of the predetermined effective period and in the predetermined effective period by the specific effect unit, monitoring of each period is individually performed by confirming the specific operation unit and the predetermined operation unit. It will be possible to do.

  Feature A21. The game machine according to Feature A20, wherein the predetermined operation control means starts the predetermined unit operation when the predetermined effective period is started.

  According to the feature A21, the administrator of the gaming hall can clearly grasp whether or not the predetermined effective period has started by confirming whether or not the predetermined unit operation has been started in the predetermined operation means. .

  Feature A22. The gaming machine according to feature A21, wherein the specific operation control means ends the specific unit operation before the predetermined valid period is started.

  According to the feature A22, the result of the specific lottery process is notified in the specific operation means before the predetermined effective period is started. Thereby, the manager of the gaming hall can grasp whether the predetermined effective period occurring thereafter is regular or not by checking the specific operation means.

Feature A23. First control means (main MPU 92) having the predetermined lottery means, the specific lottery means, and the benefit giving means;
Second control means (sound light side MPU 103, display side MPU 113) for executing processing for controlling the specific effect means based on the information transmitted by the first control means;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of features A20 to A22, wherein the first control means includes the specific operation control means and the predetermined operation control means.

  According to the feature A23, since the specific operation means and the predetermined operation means are directly controlled by the first control means, it is possible to enhance the reliability of the contents in the specific operation means and the predetermined operation means. On the other hand, since the specific effect means is controlled by the second control means, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the first control means.

  Feature A24. The bonus awarding unit is configured to execute the bonus lottery when the bonus award trigger occurs in a state where the variable entering control is triggered when the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes the nonspecific result. A feature A2 or B2 characterized in that the awarding mode of the privilege is different depending on the occurrence of the privilege giving occasion in the state where the variable entering control is triggered by the result becoming the specific result. The gaming machine according to any one of A23.

  According to the feature A24, since the awarding mode of the benefit when the benefit awarding opportunity occurs differs between the case where the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes the non-specific result and the case where the result is the specific result, the predetermined lottery is performed. Even if the result of the processing is a non-specific result, the variable ball entry control of the variable ball entry means is executed, and the benefit is awarded if a trigger for giving a benefit occurs while the variable ball entry control is performed. In the configuration to be provided, it is possible to cause a difference corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery process also to occur with respect to the content of the benefit.

Feature A25. The specific gaming state in which the variable ball entering means or the variable ball entering means different therefrom is opened is then generated as the awarding of the benefit based on the occurrence of the benefit giving opportunity,
The benefit awarding means is configured such that the result of the predetermined lottery process is the non-specific result and the benefit award trigger occurs, and the result of the predetermined lottery process is the identification result and the bonus award trigger occurs. The gaming machine according to feature A24, wherein a minimum time required for the specific gaming state to end is different.

  According to the feature A25, the specific gaming state is ended when the result of the predetermined lottery process is a non-specific result and the bonus giving trigger occurs, and when the result of the predetermined lottery process is the specific result and the bonus giving trigger occurs, By the difference in the minimum required time, it is possible to clearly distinguish the two in the appearance of the operation content of the game.

Feature A26. When the game ball enters the variable entering means in the open state in the specific gaming state, a means for giving the player an object to be given which is either the game ball or the information on the number of usable game balls (payout Device 86, a payout control device 87),
The bonus granting means, the result of the predetermined lottery process is the non-specific result and the specified gaming state by the occurrence of the bonus award trigger, the result of the predetermined lottery process is the specified result, the bonus award trigger occurs In the specific gaming state due to having done, in the case where the firing operation is performed in the same mode, compared with the case where the expected number of the granting object in the specific gaming state becomes equivalent becomes equal The gaming machine according to feature A25, wherein the gaming machine is characterized in that

  According to the feature A26, when the specific gaming state is generated, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the advantage or the disadvantage according to the result of the predetermined lottery process regarding the number of grant targets in the specific gaming state.

  Feature A27. In the benefit granting means, the result of the predetermined lottery process is the nonspecific result, and the specific gaming state due to the occurrence of the benefit award trigger is the result of the predetermined lottery process is the result of the specified lottery, and the benefit award opportunity The gaming machine according to the feature A26, characterized in that the minimum time required to finish is made longer than the specific gaming state caused by the occurrence of.

  According to the feature A27, even when the result of the predetermined lottery process is the non-specific result, when the bonus giving opportunity occurs, the minimum time required to end the specific gaming state becomes long, so that It becomes easy for the manager of the game hall to check whether the occurrence of the benefit giving opportunity is legitimate.

  Feature A28. In the benefit granting means, the result of the predetermined lottery process is the nonspecific result, and the specific gaming state due to the occurrence of the benefit award trigger is the result of the predetermined lottery process is the result of the specified lottery, and the benefit award opportunity A game machine according to Feature A27, characterized in that the period during which the variable ball entry means to be opened in the specific gaming state is maintained in the closed state is made longer than the specific gaming state due to the occurrence of.

  According to the feature A28, while preventing the number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means to be released in the specific gaming state from being affected, the minimum time required for the specific gaming state to end is extended. It becomes possible.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features A1 to A28, any one or one of the features A1 to A28, the features B1 to B12, the features C1 to C9, the features D1 to D6, the features E1 to E12, the features F1 to F3, and the features G1. Multiple configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. A specific period (distribution execution mode) or a period that allows the specific period to be started (allocation) when a specific lottery trigger (winning to the first operating unit 32 or the second operating unit 33) occurs Specific lottery means (function of executing the processing of step S301 and step S403 in the main side MPU 92) for executing a specific lottery process for determining whether or not the winning winning period of the through winning portion 35 is to be generated;
After a lottery result of the specific lottery process becomes a winning result, a predetermined lottery process is executed to execute the predetermined lottery process when a predetermined lottery trigger (a prize for distribution through winning portion 35) occurs based on the player's game operation (In the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1003 and step S1004 in the main MPU 92; in the third embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1802 and step S1803 in the main MPU 92);
Specific period setting means (a function of executing the processing of step S1104 to step S1107 in the main MPU 92) that causes the specific period corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery processing to be performed;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature B1, when the lottery result of the specific lottery process is a winning result, the specific period corresponding to the lottery result of the specific lottery process is not performed, but the lottery result of the specific lottery process is a winning result After that, a specific period corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery process to be executed when the predetermined lottery trigger occurs based on the game operation of the player is performed. As a result, in a situation in which the occurrence of the specific period is determined, the player performs the game operation while expecting that the content of the specific period is advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature B2. The gaming machine according to the feature B1, wherein the predetermined lottery opportunity is generated based on the game ball having entered a predetermined ball entry portion (distribution winning combination winning portion 35).

  According to the feature B2, since the predetermined lottery trigger occurs based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry portion, in the configuration in which the predetermined lottery trigger is generated based on the player's game operation, the predetermined lottery trigger is It becomes possible to make the occurrence conditions clear.

Feature B3. After the lottery result of the specific lottery process becomes the winning result, a predetermined effective period (effective period for winning the distribution through winning portion 35) occurs.
The predetermined lottery process is executed when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry portion during the predetermined effective period, and the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry portion during the period different from the predetermined effective period. The gaming machine according to feature B2, wherein the predetermined lottery process is not executed.

  According to the feature B3, it is possible to limit the situation in which the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry section triggers the execution of the predetermined lottery process, and the result of the specific lottery process is not the winning result Therefore, it is possible to prevent the predetermined lottery process from being executed.

  Feature B4. When the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry portion, the predetermined effective period and the period different from the predetermined effective period are either the game ball or the available game ball number information The gaming machine according to the feature B3, comprising means (a payout device 86, a payout control device 87) for giving an object to a player.

  According to the feature B4, when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry section, the awarding mode is provided to the player even in a period different from the predetermined effective period, so that the game ball to the predetermined ball entry section It is possible to give a player a benefit for the occurrence of entering the ball.

  Feature B5. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B4, wherein the specific period setting unit starts the specific period when the predetermined lottery process is performed.

  According to the feature B5, it is possible to set the predetermined lottery trigger not only as the execution trigger of the predetermined lottery process but also as the start trigger of the specific period. This makes it possible to facilitate the understanding of the game content as compared with the configuration in which each opportunity is different.

  Feature B6. A game machine according to any one of features B1 to B5, comprising result notifying means (sorting display unit 42c) for notifying information corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery process.

  According to the feature B6, it is possible to notify the content of the specific period determined by the predetermined lottery process.

Feature B7. First control means (main MPU 92) having the specific lottery means, the predetermined lottery means, and the specific period setting means;
Second control means (sound light side MPU 103, display side MPU 113) that executes processing for controlling execution of the effect in the specific effect means based on the information transmitted by the first control means;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature B6, wherein the result notification means is controlled by the first control means.

  According to the feature B7, it is possible to increase the reliability of the information displayed on the result notification means.

  Feature B8. The specific operation control means (the special operation display means 42a) is controlled to have the operation content corresponding to the lottery result of the specific lottery process when the specific unit operation is started and the particular unit operation is ended. A game machine according to feature B6 or B7, characterized in that the main MPU 92 has a function of executing the processing of step S412, step S803 and step S804.

  According to the feature B8, the means for notifying that the specific lottery process has been executed and the lottery result of the specific lottery process, and the means for notifying the result of the predetermined lottery process are the specific operation means and the result notifying means Provided separately. Thus, it becomes possible to individually monitor each content by confirming the specific operation means and the result notification means.

  Feature B9. The specific effect means is started when the specific lottery process is executed, and the specific unit effect is continued so that the specific unit effect is continued in the specific period when the specific period is performed thereafter. 44) A gaming machine according to feature B8, comprising means (display side MPU 113) for controlling the display.

  According to the feature B9, by performing a series of effects before the start of the specific period and including the specific period in the specific effect means, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effects in these periods. In addition, in a configuration in which a series of effects are executed before the start of a specific period and in a specific period in this way, the specific effect means individually monitor the contents of each by confirming the specific operation means and the result notification means. It will be possible to do.

  Feature B10. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B6 to B9, wherein the notification of the information corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery process in the result notification means is started when the specific period is started.

  According to the feature B10, the content of the specific period determined by the predetermined lottery process can be notified at the start of the specific period.

  Feature B11. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B6 to B10, wherein the notification of the information corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery process in the result notification means is continued in the specific period.

  According to the feature B11, by confirming the result notifying means at an arbitrary timing of the specific period, it becomes possible to grasp the content of the specific period determined by the predetermined lottery process.

Feature B12. Variable ball entry means (sorting winning device 36) capable of switching between the open state and the closed state;
Variable ball entering control means for performing variable ball entering control to switch to the closed state after the variable ball entering means is brought into the open state (function to execute the process for starting distribution and the process for distributing in the main side MPU 92) ,
Equipped with
The specific period is a period during which the variable ball entry control is performed,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B11, wherein the bonus provision trigger is generated by the gaming ball having entered the variable entering means.

  According to the feature B12, even if the game ball enters the variable ball entry means, the player can not receive the bonus unless the bonus ball is generated by the gaming ball. Thus, when variable entering control of the variable entering means is executed, the player not only enters the game ball into the variable entering means but also enters the game into the variable entering means. It is expected that the opportunity to grant benefits will be generated by the ball. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation becomes gradual, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features B1 to B12, any one or one of the features A1 to A28, the features B1 to B12, the features C1 to C9, the features D1 to D6, the features E1 to E12, the features F1 to F3, and the features G1. Multiple configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. The player is given a benefit (transition to the open / close execution mode) based on the occurrence of the benefit giving trigger (detection of the gaming ball in the V prize detection sensor 69) due to the player's game operation in the specific period (distribution execution mode). Privilege giving means (the function of executing the process of step S1311 in the main MPU 92)
The predetermined operation control means (step S 905, step S 1001, step S 1101, step S 1201, step S 1201, step S 1302 and so on in the main MPU 92) which controls the predetermined operation means (distribution distribution unit 42 c) so that the predetermined unit operation is performed in the specific period. A function of executing the process of step S1306),
Equipped with
The predetermined operation control means changes the execution mode of the predetermined unit operation according to whether or not the benefit provision trigger has occurred in the specific period (steps S1302 and S1306 in the main MPU 92) A game machine characterized by having a function of performing

  According to the feature C1, the player performs the game operation while expecting the occurrence of the privilege giving occasion during the specific period by giving the benefit based on the occurrence of the privilege giving occasion during the specific period. Become. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In this case, by performing the predetermined unit operation by the predetermined operation means in the specific period, it is possible to grasp whether or not it is the specific period by confirming the predetermined operation means. In addition, in a configuration in which cases where benefits are awarded and cases where benefits are not given occur depending on whether or not a privilege giving occasion occurs in a specific period, predetermined depending on whether or not a privilege giving occasion occurs in the specific period. The execution mode of the unit operation changes. Thus, the predetermined unit operation can be functioned not only as an operation for notifying a specific period, but also as an operation for notifying whether or not a benefit provision trigger has occurred in the specific period.

Feature C2. First control means (main MPU 92) for controlling the progress of the game;
Second control means (sound light side MPU 103, display side MPU 113) that executes processing for controlling execution of the effect in the specific effect means based on the information transmitted by the first control means;
Equipped with
The first control means is
The player is given a benefit (transition to the open / close execution mode) based on the occurrence of the benefit giving trigger (detection of the gaming ball in the V prize detection sensor 69) due to the player's game operation in the specific period (distribution execution mode). Privilege giving means (the function of executing the process of step S1311 in the main MPU 92)
The predetermined operation control means (step S 905, step S 1001, step S 1101, step S 1201, step S 1201, step S 1302 and so on in the main MPU 92) which controls the predetermined operation means (distribution distribution unit 42 c) so that the predetermined unit operation is performed in the specific period. A function of executing the process of step S1306),
Equipped with
The predetermined operation control means changes the execution mode of the predetermined unit operation according to whether or not the benefit provision trigger has occurred in the specific period (steps S1302 and S1306 in the main MPU 92) A game machine characterized by having a function of performing

  According to the feature C2, the player performs the game operation while expecting that the bonus granting opportunity occurs in the specific period, by providing the benefit based on the occurrence of the benefit granting opportunity in the specific period. Become. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In this case, by performing the predetermined unit operation by the predetermined operation means in the specific period, it is possible to grasp whether or not it is the specific period by confirming the predetermined operation means. In addition, in a configuration in which cases where benefits are awarded and cases where benefits are not given occur depending on whether or not a privilege giving occasion occurs in a specific period, predetermined depending on whether or not a privilege giving occasion occurs in the specific period. The execution mode of the unit operation changes. Thus, it becomes possible to function the predetermined unit operation not only as an operation for notifying a specific period, but also as an operation for notifying whether or not a benefit provision trigger has occurred in the specific period.

  Further, in the configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing not only the first control means but also the second control means for executing processing for controlling the execution of the effect, the predetermined operation means is the second control means. And directly controlled by the first control means. This makes it possible to improve the reliability of the content in the predetermined operation means.

  Feature C3. The game machine according to the feature C1 or C2, wherein the mode determination means causes the content of the notification result in the case of ending the predetermined unit operation to correspond to the presence or absence of the bonus provision trigger in the specific period. .

  According to the feature C3, by confirming the notification result when the predetermined unit operation ends, it is possible to grasp whether or not the benefit provision trigger has occurred in the specific period. Therefore, it is possible to set the confirmation timing in the case of confirming whether or not the privilege giving trigger has occurred by the content of the predetermined operation means to be an easy-to-understand timing.

Feature C4. The specific period is configured to continue until the termination condition is established even if the benefit grant trigger occurs,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C3, wherein the predetermined operation control means ends the predetermined unit operation when the specific period ends.

  According to the feature C4, since the specific period is continued even when the benefit giving opportunity occurs, the period in which the specific period is being executed is not varied according to the occurrence timing of the benefit giving opportunity. It becomes possible. In addition, since the predetermined unit operation is ended when the specific period ends, it is possible to grasp the end timing of the specific period by confirming the predetermined operation means.

Feature C5. The mode determining means causes the content of the notification result in the case of terminating the predetermined unit operation to correspond to the presence or absence of the occurrence of the benefit giving trigger in the specific period,
The gaming machine is provided with a notification execution means (display side MPU 113) that causes a notification corresponding to the occurrence of the benefit provision opportunity to be executed when the benefit provision opportunity occurs in the specific period. The gaming machine according to feature C4, characterized in that

  According to the feature C5, by checking the notification result when the predetermined unit operation is finished, it is possible to grasp whether or not the benefit provision trigger has occurred in the specific period. Therefore, it is possible to set the confirmation timing in the case of confirming whether or not the privilege giving trigger has occurred by the content of the predetermined operation means to be an easy-to-understand timing. On the other hand, when a benefit giving opportunity occurs in the specific period, the corresponding notification is executed, so that the player can easily grasp that the benefit giving opportunity has occurred.

Feature C6. Means for starting the specific period (step S1104 in the main MPU 92) when a predetermined trigger (winning on the distribution through winning portion 35) occurs in a predetermined effective period (winning effective period of the distribution through winning portion 35) ~ Function to execute the process of step S1107)
The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C5, wherein the predetermined operation control means starts the predetermined unit operation when the predetermined effective period is started.

  According to the feature C6, it is possible to notify that it is a predetermined effective period using a predetermined unit operation.

Feature C7. A period in which it is possible to start the specific period or the specific period when the specific lottery opportunity (winning to the first operation unit 32 or the second operation unit 33) occurs (of the distribution through winning portion 35 Specific lottery means (function of executing the processing of step S301 and step S403 in the main side MPU 92) for executing a specific lottery process for determining whether or not to obtain a winning prize effective period);
The specific operation control means (the special operation display means 42a) is controlled to have the operation content corresponding to the lottery result of the specific lottery process when the specific unit operation is started and the particular unit operation is ended. A function of executing the processing of step S412, step S803 and step S804 in the main MPU 92),
A game machine according to any one of the features C1 to C6, comprising:

  According to the feature C7, the operation means for notifying that the specific lottery process has been executed and the lottery result of the specific lottery process, and the operation means for notifying that there is a specific period and the occurrence of the benefit giving opportunity. Are separately provided as specific operation means and predetermined operation means. Thereby, it becomes possible to monitor each period individually by confirming the specific operation means and the predetermined operation means.

  Feature C8. The specific effect means is started when the specific lottery process is executed, and the specific unit effect is continued so that the specific unit effect is continued in the specific period when the specific period is performed thereafter. 44) The gaming machine according to the feature C7, comprising means (display side MPU 113) for controlling the display unit.

  According to the feature C8, by performing a series of effects before the start of the specific period and including the specific period in the specific effect means, it is possible to enhance the effect in these periods. In addition, in a configuration in which a series of effects are executed before the start of a specific period and in a specific period as described above by the specific effect unit, monitoring of each period is individually performed by confirming the specific operation unit and the predetermined operation unit. It will be possible to do.

Feature C9. Variable ball entry means (sorting winning device 36) capable of switching between the open state and the closed state;
Variable ball entering control means for performing variable ball entering control to switch to the closed state after the variable ball entering means is brought into the open state (function to execute the process for starting distribution and the process for distributing in the main side MPU 92) ,
Equipped with
The specific period is a period during which the variable ball entry control is performed,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C8, wherein the bonus provision trigger is generated by the gaming ball having entered the variable entering means.

  According to the feature C9, even if the game ball enters the variable ball entry means, the player can not receive the bonus unless the bonus ball is generated by the gaming ball. Thus, when variable entering control of the variable entering means is executed, the player not only enters the game ball into the variable entering means but also enters the game into the variable entering means. It is expected that the opportunity to grant benefits will be generated by the ball. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation becomes gradual, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. In this case, the configuration of the feature C1 or the feature C2 is provided, and in the specific period, the specific unit operation is executed by the specific operation means, and it is clarified that the specific period and the benefit provision opportunity have occurred. It is possible to

  Note that with respect to the configuration of the features C1 to C9, any one or one of the features A1 to A28, the features B1 to B12, the features C1 to C9, the features D1 to D6, the features E1 to E12, the features F1 to F3, and the features G1. Multiple configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. The player is given a benefit (transition to the open / close execution mode) based on the occurrence of the benefit giving trigger (detection of the gaming ball in the V prize detection sensor 69) due to the player's game operation in the specific period (distribution execution mode). A privilege giving unit (a function of executing the processing of step S1311 in the main MPU 92)
As the specific period, at least a first specific period (first distribution execution mode) and a second specific period (second distribution execution mode) are set such that the degree of expectation at which the benefit provision trigger occurs is different. Yes,
The privilege giving means is characterized in that the giving mode of the privilege is made different between when the privilege giving occasion occurs in the first specific period and when the privilege giving occasion occurs in the second specific period. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature D1, the player performs the game operation while expecting that the bonus granting opportunity occurs in the specific period, by providing the benefit based on the occurrence of the benefit granting opportunity in the specific period. Become. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, as the specific period, there is a first specific period and a second specific period such that the degree of expectation at which the benefit provision trigger occurs is different. As a result, the specific period is diversified in relation to the generation expectation degree of the privilege giving opportunity, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game also from this point.

  In this case, the awarding mode of the privilege is different between the case where the privilege giving occasion occurs in the first specific period and the case where the privilege giving occasion occurs in the second specific period. As a result, it is possible to not only differ in the expected occurrence degree of the benefit provision trigger between the first specific period and the second specific period, but also to make different the grant mode of the benefit to be granted when the benefit impartment trigger occurs. , And the difference between the first specific period and the second specific period can be clarified.

Feature D2. Based on the occurrence of the benefit awarding occasion, a specific gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) in which the predetermined variable ball entry means (the special power winning device 37) is opened is generated as the awarding of the benefit thereafter. ,
The bonus granting means is, at least, before the specific gaming state is ended, when the bonus award trigger occurs in the first specific period and when the bonus award trigger occurs in the second specific period. The gaming machine according to feature D1, characterized in that the required times are different.

  According to the feature D2, the minimum required time until the specific gaming state ends is different between the case where the privilege giving occasion occurs in the first specific period and the case where the privilege giving occasion occurs in the second specific period. This makes it possible to clearly distinguish the two in the appearance of the operation content of the game.

Feature D3. When the gaming ball enters the predetermined variable entering means, a means (a payout device 86, a payout control device 87) for giving a player a grant target which is either a gaming ball or usable gaming ball number information Equipped
The privilege giving means is fired in the specific gaming state by the occurrence of the benefit giving occasion in the first specific period, and in the specific gaming state by the occurrence of the benefit giving occasion in the second specific period. As described in the feature D2, characterized in that the number of grants to be granted is expected to be the same in the specific gaming state as compared with the case where the operation is performed in the same mode. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature D3, when the specific gaming state occurs, with regard to the number of grants to be provided in the specific gaming state, there is no advantage or disadvantage according to the type of the specific period that triggered the occurrence of the specific gaming state It will be possible to

Feature D4. The second specific period is configured to have a lower expectation than the first specific period in which the benefit provision trigger occurs.
The bonus granting means is more effective in the specific gaming state than the specific gaming state in the first specific period in the first specific period, in the second specific period. The game machine according to Feature D3, characterized in that the time required to complete the process is extended.

  According to the feature D4, even when the second specific period has occurred, when the privilege giving occasion has occurred, the minimum time required to end the specific gaming state becomes long, so the occurrence of the privilege giving occasion occurs. It becomes easy for the game hall manager to check whether or not the game is legitimate.

  Feature D5. The bonus granting means is more effective in the specific gaming state than the specific gaming state in the first specific period in the first specific period, in the second specific period. A game machine according to feature D4, characterized in that the period during which the variable ball entry means to be opened in the specific gaming state is maintained in the closed state is extended.

  According to the feature D5, while preventing the number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means to be released in the specific gaming state from being affected, the minimum time required for the specific gaming state to end is extended. It becomes possible.

Feature D6. Variable ball entry means (sorting winning device 36) capable of switching between the open state and the closed state;
Variable ball entering control means for performing variable ball entering control to switch to the closed state after the variable ball entering means is brought into the open state (function to execute the process for starting distribution and the process for distributing in the main side MPU 92) ,
Equipped with
The specific period is a period during which the variable ball entry control is performed,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D5, wherein the bonus provision trigger is generated by the gaming ball having entered the variable entering means.

  According to the feature D6, even if the game ball enters the variable ball entry means, the player can not receive the bonus unless the bonus ball is generated by the gaming ball. Thus, when variable entering control of the variable entering means is executed, the player not only enters the game ball into the variable entering means but also enters the game into the variable entering means. It is expected that the opportunity to grant benefits will be generated by the ball. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation becomes gradual, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features D1 to D6, any one of the features A1 to A28, the features B1 to B12, the features C1 to C9, the features D1 to D6, the features E1 to E12, the features F1 to F3, and the features G1 Multiple configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. First lottery means for executing the first lottery process (a function for executing the process of step S1904 in the main MPU 92);
Second lottery means for executing a second lottery process (a function of executing the process of step S1803 in the main MPU 92, a function of executing the process of step S2902 in the main MPU 92);
Both the probability of becoming a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of becoming a specific lottery result in the second lottery process are those probabilities in a predetermined situation (a situation in which the probability corresponding to the low probability winning result is set) Probability fluctuation means capable of causing a situation having a probability different from (in the fourth embodiment, the fifth embodiment and the eighth embodiment, the function of executing the game state transition processing in the main MPU 92, In the sixth embodiment and the seventh embodiment, the function of executing the first gaming state transition processing and the second gaming state transition processing in the main MPU 92),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature E1, the probability of becoming a predetermined lottery result may fluctuate in the first lottery process, and the probability of becoming a specific lottery result may fluctuate in the second lottery process. This makes it possible to diversify the execution mode of each lottery process. Further, both the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process may be different from those in the predetermined situation. This makes it possible to cause a situation in which the execution modes of both the first lottery process and the second lottery process are changing at the same time, and the contents of the game progressing through the results of the first lottery process and the second lottery process Can be greatly different. Therefore, the standardization of the game is suppressed, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature E2. A predetermined benefit giving means (a processing of step S2008 in the main side MPU 92) for giving a predetermined benefit to the player based on the specific lottery result in the second lottery process after the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process A game machine according to feature E1, characterized in that it has a function of performing

  According to the feature E2, in order to be awarded the predetermined benefit, it is necessary to become a predetermined lottery result at least in the first lottery process and to become a specific lottery result in the second lottery process. Therefore, the number of lottery processes targeted by the player who expects the predetermined privilege to be given becomes a plurality, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, the probability of integrating the probability of becoming a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of becoming a specific lottery result in the second lottery process will affect the provision probability of the predetermined benefit. In this case, the configuration of the feature E1 is provided, and both the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process may be different from those in the predetermined situation. As a result, it is possible to diversify the provision probability of the predetermined benefit as compared with a configuration in which only one of the probability of the first lottery process and the probability of the second lottery process changes. In addition, even if the probability of becoming a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of becoming a specific lottery result in the second lottery process are not greatly varied, it is possible to largely vary the provision probability of the predetermined benefit.

  In the configuration of the feature E2, an execution trigger of the second lottery process may be generated only when the predetermined lottery result is obtained in the first lottery process. In this case, in order to be awarded a predetermined privilege, it is necessary to become a specific lottery result in the second lottery process, and to be able to execute the second lottery process it is necessary to become a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the first lottery process.

  Feature E3. At least one of at least one of the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process is described in the feature E1 or E2. Of gaming machines.

  According to the feature E3, at least one of the probability of becoming a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of becoming a specific lottery result in the second lottery process exists in three or more types, so the probability of each lottery process While being able to be diversified, the synthetic | combination probability of those lottery processes can also be diversified.

  Feature E4. The probability variation means includes a predetermined lottery result in a plurality of types of lottery processing including the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery processing and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery processing. The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E3, wherein the probability is varied such that an increase with respect to the combination probability in the predetermined situation at a combination probability of the probability is up to a predetermined increase.

  According to the feature E4, in a configuration in which both the probability of becoming a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery processing and the probability of becoming a specific lottery result in the second lottery processing are varied, a plurality of types of lottery processing including them are predetermined It becomes possible to prevent the combined probability of the probability of being a lottery result from becoming extremely higher than in the case of the predetermined situation.

  Feature E5. The probability variation unit is configured to select a target probability that is one of the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process in the plurality of types of lottery processes. Correction means for correcting according to the probability of the lottery process (in the fifth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2307 in the main MPU 92, in the sixth embodiment, the processing of steps S2505 and S2605 in the main MPU 92) A game machine according to the feature E4, characterized in that it has a function to be executed, which is the function of executing the processing of step S2708 and step S2808 in the main MPU 92 in the seventh embodiment.

  According to the feature E5, the target probability is corrected according to the probability of the other lottery processing, so that the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery processing and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery processing are individualized. Even if the configuration fluctuates, it is possible to make the increase with respect to the combination probability in the predetermined situation of the combination probability up to the predetermined increase.

  Feature E6. The probability variation means varies both the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process when a predetermined variation condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5.

  According to the feature E6, it is possible to generate a situation in which the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process are collectively changed.

Feature E7. The probability varying means is
First variation means (a function to execute the first gaming state transition process in the main MPU 92) that changes the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process based on the occurrence of the first opportunity;
Second variation means (a function to execute a second gaming state transition process in the main side MPU 92) that changes the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process based on the occurrence of the second opportunity;
The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E6, comprising:

  According to the feature E7, a situation in which the probability of becoming a predetermined lottery result fluctuates in the first lottery process and a situation in which the probability of becoming a specific lottery result in the second lottery process fluctuates individually occur. This makes it possible to diversify the setting manner of each probability.

Feature E8. The gaming machine according to feature E7, comprising at least one of the following configuration (1) and the following configuration (2).
(1) In the first variation process, the first trigger occurs a predetermined number of times in a state where the probability that the predetermined lottery result will be the result in the first lottery process is different from the probability in the predetermined situation A unit (a function of executing the processing of step S2701 and step S2711 in the main MPU 92) is provided.
(2) The second variation means causes the second trigger to occur a specific number of times in a state where the probability of becoming the specific lottery result in the second lottery processing becomes a probability different from the probability in the predetermined situation A unit (a function of executing the processing of step S2801 and step S2811 in the main MPU 92) is provided.

  According to the feature E8, the situation in which at least one of the probability of becoming a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of becoming a specific lottery result in the second lottery process continues to a certain extent the probability of being different from the probability in the predetermined situation Is possible. This makes it possible to continue the situation in which the probability is fluctuating to some extent.

  The feature E8 may be configured to include means for changing the predetermined number of times or means for changing the specific number of times. In this case, it is possible to diversify the continuation aspect of the situation where the probability is fluctuating.

Feature E9. The first variation means causes a situation in which the probability of becoming the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process becomes a probability different from the probability in the predetermined situation or continues until the first trigger occurs a predetermined number of times Means (function of executing the processing of step S2701 and step S2711 in the main MPU 92);
The second variation means causes a situation in which the probability of becoming the specific lottery result in the second lottery process becomes a probability different from the probability in the predetermined situation or continues until the second trigger occurs a specific number of times And means for executing the processing of step S2801 and step S2811 in the main MPU 92,
The gaming machine according to Feature E7, wherein the predetermined number of times and the specific number of times are different times or may be different times.

  According to the feature E9, it is possible to continue to a certain extent the situation in which the probability of becoming a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of becoming a specific lottery result in the second lottery process are different from the probability in the predetermined situation . This makes it possible to continue the situation in which the probability is fluctuating to some extent. In addition, even if the predetermined number of times and the specific number of times are different times or can be different times, the duration of the situation in which the probability fluctuates for one of the first lottery process and the second lottery process is ended. Regardless of the other, it is possible to keep the situation where the probability fluctuates being continued. Therefore, it becomes possible to diversify the fluctuation mode of each probability, and it becomes possible to aim at the interest improvement of a game.

  Feature E10. The probability variation unit is configured to select one of the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process than the probability of the corresponding lottery process in the predetermined situation. A game machine according to any one of the features E1 to E9, characterized in that it may cause a situation that is higher and the other is lower than the probability of the corresponding lottery process in the predetermined situation.

  According to the feature E10, one of the probability of becoming a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of being a specific lottery result in the second lottery process is more advantageous than the predetermined situation and the other is more disadvantageous than the predetermined situation It can be generated. This makes it possible to diversify the setting manner of each probability.

  Feature E11. A notification corresponding to one of the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process is notified, and the notification corresponding to the other is not performed. A game machine according to any one of features E1 to E10, characterized by comprising means (a function for executing the processing of step S2204, step S2208 and step S2211 in the main side MPU 92, the sound light side MPU 103).

  According to the feature E11, while the notification corresponding to one of the probabilities is performed, the notification corresponding to the other is not performed, so that one lottery probability is confirmed while checking the notification content. It is possible to generate a situation that predicts the lottery probability of a part. This makes it possible to diversify the manner of attention to the game in relation to each lottery probability, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature E12. First lottery means for executing the first lottery process (a function for executing the process of step S1904 in the main MPU 92);
Second lottery means for executing a second lottery process (a function of executing the process of step S1803 in the main MPU 92, a function of executing the process of step S2902 in the main MPU 92);
Both the probability of becoming a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of becoming a specific lottery result in the second lottery process are those probabilities in a predetermined situation (a situation in which the probability corresponding to the low probability winning result is set) Probability fluctuation means capable of causing a situation having a probability different from (in the fourth embodiment, the fifth embodiment and the eighth embodiment, the function of executing the game state transition processing in the main MPU 92, In the sixth embodiment and the seventh embodiment, the function of executing the first gaming state transition processing and the second gaming state transition processing in the main MPU 92),
A predetermined benefit giving means (a processing of step S2008 in the main side MPU 92) for giving a predetermined benefit to the player based on the specific lottery result in the second lottery process after the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process And the ability to perform
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature E12, the probability of becoming a predetermined lottery result may fluctuate in the first lottery process, and the probability of becoming a specific lottery result may fluctuate in the second lottery process. This makes it possible to diversify the execution mode of each lottery process. Further, both the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process may be different from those in the predetermined situation. This makes it possible to cause a situation in which the execution modes of both the first lottery process and the second lottery process are changing at the same time, and the contents of the game progressing through the results of the first lottery process and the second lottery process Can be greatly different. Therefore, the standardization of the game is suppressed, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, in order to be awarded the predetermined privilege, it is necessary to become a predetermined lottery result at least in the first lottery process and to become a specific lottery result in the second lottery process. Therefore, the number of lottery processes targeted by the player who expects the predetermined privilege to be given becomes a plurality, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, the probability of integrating the probability of becoming a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of becoming a specific lottery result in the second lottery process will affect the provision probability of the predetermined benefit. In this case, both the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process may be different from those in the predetermined situation. As a result, it is possible to diversify the provision probability of the predetermined benefit as compared with a configuration in which only one of the probability of the first lottery process and the probability of the second lottery process changes. In addition, even if the probability of becoming a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of becoming a specific lottery result in the second lottery process are not greatly varied, it is possible to largely vary the provision probability of the predetermined benefit.

  In the configuration of the feature E12, an execution trigger of the second lottery process may be generated only when the predetermined lottery result is obtained in the first lottery process. In this case, in order to be awarded a predetermined privilege, it is necessary to become a specific lottery result in the second lottery process, and to be able to execute the second lottery process it is necessary to become a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the first lottery process.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features E1 to E12, any one or one of the features A1 to A28, the features B1 to B12, the features C1 to C9, the features D1 to D6, the features E1 to E12, the features F1 to F3, and the features G1. Multiple configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. Special lottery means (a function for executing the determination processing of acceptance or rejection or the distribution determination processing in the main side MPU 92) for executing the special lottery processing;
In the special lottery process, probability variation means capable of generating a situation in which the probability of becoming a special lottery result becomes a probability different from the predetermined situation (the process of step S2705 to step S2708 or step S2805 to step S2808 in the main MPU 92) Function to execute)
Return means (function of executing the process of step S2712 or step S2812 in the main MPU 92) for returning the probability of becoming the special lottery result in the special lottery process to the probability in the predetermined situation when the return condition is satisfied;
Equipped with
A game machine characterized in that a plurality of types of return conditions exist.

  According to the feature F1, it is possible to diversify an aspect in which the probability of becoming a special lottery result in the special lottery processing returns to the probability in the predetermined situation. Thus, for example, if the probability that the special lottery result is a probability is more favorable than the predetermined situation, the player expects the return condition to be hard to return to the predetermined situation, for example, the probability that the special lottery result will be If the situation is a probability disadvantageous to the predetermined situation, the player is expected to be a return condition that is easy to return to the predetermined situation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature F2. The probability changing means sets the probability that the special lottery result is to be the special lottery result in the special lottery process to a probability different from the predetermined situation, and then, when the special trigger occurs in the situation where the return condition is not satisfied, the special lottery The gaming machine according to feature F1, characterized in that the probability to be the result can be varied.

  According to the feature F2, since the probability may fluctuate even if the return condition for the probability of becoming a special lottery result to return to the probability in the predetermined situation is not satisfied, the setting mode of the probability is diversified, It becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature F3. The probability varying means is capable of producing a situation in which the probability of becoming a special lottery result in the special lottery process becomes a probability different from a predetermined situation when a special opportunity occurs, and in the special lottery process A situation in which the probability of becoming a special lottery result becomes a probability different from the probability in the predetermined situation is that which is continued until the special trigger occurs a special number of times,
The return condition is established with at least one condition that the special trigger has occurred the special number of times,
The gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, wherein a plurality of types of the special number exist.

  According to the feature F3, it is possible to diversify the continuation aspect of the situation in which the probability of becoming a special lottery result varies from the probability in the predetermined situation. In this case, if, for example, the probability that the special lottery result will be obtained is more advantageous than the predetermined situation, the player is expected to select the number of continuations in which the situation where the probability fluctuates continues for a long time. If the probability of being a lottery result is more disadvantageous than the predetermined situation, the player is expected to select the number of continuations in which the situation where the probability is fluctuating does not continue very much. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features F1 to F3, any one or one of the features A1 to A28, the features B1 to B12, the features C1 to C9, the features D1 to D6, the features E1 to E12, the features F1 to F3, and the features G1 Multiple configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. Special lottery means (a function for executing the determination processing of acceptance or rejection or the distribution determination processing in the main side MPU 92) for executing the special lottery processing;
Selection means for selecting the probability of becoming a special lottery result in the special lottery process from among the three or more types of probability (in the fourth embodiment, the fifth embodiment and the eighth embodiment, the game state transition in the main MPU 92) The function of executing the process, and in the sixth and seventh embodiments, the function of executing the first gaming state transition process and the second gaming state transition process in the main MPU 92;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature G1, when there are three or more types of probability that the special lottery result will be made, it is possible to diversify the setting mode of the probability, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Note that for the configuration of feature G1, any one or more of features A1 to A28, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F3, and features G1 The configuration may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature group A, the feature group B, the feature group C, the feature group D, the feature group E, the feature group F, and the feature group G, the following problems can be solved It is.

  Pachinko machines, slot machines and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a bonus is provided to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is general that an effect for causing a player to predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery is performed.

  About a pachinko machine Specifically, a lottery is performed based on the game ball entering the ball entry section provided in the game area, and the variation display of the pattern is performed on the display surface of the display device, and the lottery is performed It is known that, when a winning result is obtained, the combination of a specific pattern etc. is displayed on the display surface as a final stop, and a transition to a special gaming state advantageous to the player is made. And when it shifts to the special game state, opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area, for example, is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entry into the ball entry device.

  Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or applied to each of the features is described below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball firing means for firing game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the fired game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine comprising: each gaming component arranged in an area, and providing a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of the gaming components.

  Throttle type gaming machines such as slot machines: A pattern display device for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, variable display of the plurality of patterns is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and the cause is due to the operation of the stop operation means And / or a variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped when a predetermined time elapses, and a game machine which provides a bonus to the player according to the symbols after the stop.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 Pachinko machine, 32 ... 1st operation part, 33 ... 2nd operation part, 35 ... through winning combination part for distribution, 36 ... distribution winning device, 37 ... special power prize device, 42a ... special figure display part, 42c ... Distribution display unit 44 Symbol display device 69 V prize detection sensor 86 Payout device 87 Payout control device 92 Main side MPU 103 Sound light side MPU 113 Display side MPU.

Claims (1)

State generation means for generating a specific gaming state in which the predetermined variable entering means is in an open state based on the generation of the benefit giving opportunity by the game operation of the player in the specific period ;
A means for giving a player an object to be given, which is either a game ball or usable game ball number information, when the game ball enters the predetermined variable ball entry means;
Equipped with
As the specific period, at least a first specific period and a second specific period are set such that the degree of expectation at which the benefit provision trigger occurs differs.
In the state generation means, the firing operation is performed in the specific gaming state due to the occurrence of the benefit giving trigger in the first specific period and in the specific gaming state due to the occurrence of the benefit giving opportunity in the second specific period. In the case where the privilege giving occasion occurs in the first specific period, while making the number of giving targets expected to be given in the specific gaming state equal in comparison with the case where it is performed in the same mode A gaming machine, characterized in that a minimum time required for the specific gaming state to end is different from when a bonus giving trigger occurs in the second specific period .

Images